MRS-8(E).

book 1 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Operation Manual

© ZOOM Corporation
Reproduction of this manual, in whole or in part, by any means, is prohibited.
MRS-8(E).book 2 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Pay close attention to the labelling of the battery to
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS make sure you choose the correct type.
• When not using the unit for an extended period,
remove the batteries from the unit.
In this manual, symbols are used to highlight warnings and
• If battery leakage has occurred, wipe the battery
cautions for you to read so that accidents can be prevented.
compartment and the battery terminals carefully to
The meanings of these symbols are as follows:
remove all remnants of battery fluid.
• While using the unit, the battery compartment
This symbol indicates explanations about
cover should be closed.
extremely dangerous matters. If users
Warning ignore this symbol and handle the device
• Environment
the wrong way, serious injury or death could To prevent the risk of fire, electric shock or
result. Warning malfunction, avoid using your MRS-8 in
environments where it will be exposed to:
This symbol indicates explanations about
dangerous matters. If users ignore this • Extreme temperatures
Caution symbol and handle the device the wrong
• Heat sources such as radiators or stoves
way, bodily injury and damage to the • High humidity or moisture
equipment could result. • Excessive dust or sand
• Excessive vibration or shock
Please observe the following safety tips and precautions to
ensure hazard-free use of the MRS-8. • Handling
• Never place objects filled with liquids, such as
• Power requirements Warning vases, on the MRS-8 since this can cause electric
Since power consumption of this unit is fairly high, shock.
Warning we recommend the use of an AC adapter whenever • Do not place naked flame sources, such as lighted
possible. When powering the unit from batteries, use candles, on the MRS-8 since this can cause fire.
only alkaline types.
The MRS-8 is a precision instrument. Do not exert
[AC adapter operation] Caution undue pressure on the keys and other controls. Also
• Be sure to use only an AC adapter which supplies take care not to drop the unit, and do not subject it to
9 V DC, 300 mA and is equipped with a "center shock or excessive pressure.
minus" plug (Zoom AD-0006). The use of an
adapter other than the specified type may damage • Connecting cables and input and output jacks
the unit and pose a safety hazard. You should always turn off the power to the MRS-8
• Connect the AC adapter only to an AC outlet that Caution and all other equipment before connecting or
supplies the rated voltage required by the adapter. disconnecting any cables. Also make sure to
• When disconnecting the AC adapter from the AC disconnect all connection cables and the power cord
outlet, always grasp the adapter itself and do not before moving the MRS-8.
pull at the cable.
• During lightning or when not using the unit for an • Alterations
extended period, disconnect the AC adapter from Never open the case of the MRS-8 or attempt to
the AC outlet. Warning modify the product in any way since this can result in
damage to the unit.
[Battery operation]
• Use four conventional IEC R6 (size AA) batteries • Volume
(alkaline). Do not use the MRS-8 at a loud volume for a long
• The MRS-8 cannot be used for recharging. Caution time since this can cause hearing impairment.

2 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 3 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

* MIDI is a registered trademark of Association of

Usage Precautions Musical Electronics Industry(AMEI).

* SD Logo is a trademark.
• Electrical interference
For safety considerations, the MRS-8 has been designed to * All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned
provide maximum protection against the emission of in this manual are for identification purposes only and
electromagnetic radiation from inside the device, and are not intended to infringe on the copyrighted
protection from external interference. However, equipment properties of their respective owners.
that is very susceptible to interference or that emits powerful
electromagnetic waves should not be placed near the MRS-
8, as the possibility of interference cannot be ruled out
entirely.

With any type of digital control device, the MRS-8 included,

electromagnetic interference can cause malfunctioning and
can corrupt or destroy data. Care should be taken to
minimize the risk of damage.

• Cleaning
Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the MRS-8. If necessary,
slightly moisten the cloth. Do not use abrasive cleanser, wax,
or solvents (such as paint thinner or cleaning alcohol), since
these may dull the finish or damage the surface.

• Backup
The data of MRS-8 can be lost because of malfunction or
incorrect operation. Backup your data.

• Copyrights
Except for personal use, unauthorized recording from
copyrighted sources(CDs, records, tapes, video clips,
broadcast material and so on) is prohibited.
ZOOM Corporation does not bear any liability for
injunctions regarding the copyright law infringement.

Please keep this manual in a convenient place for

future reference.

ZOOM MRS-8 3
MRS-8(E).book 4 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Contents
USAGE AND SAFETY Step 4: Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4.1 Adjusting volume, panning, and EQ. . . . . . 26
4.2 Applying the send/return effect . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3 Applying the insert effect to a track. . . . . . 28
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Step 5: Mixdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Introducing the MRS-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1 Using the mastering effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5.2 Mixdown onto the master track . . . . . . . . . 30
Rhythm section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Reference [Recorder] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 V-takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Switching V-takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Changing the V-take name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Moving to a desired point in the song

(locate function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rear panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting marks in a song (marker function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting a mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Locating a mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Inserting SD Card and Batteries. . . . . . 13 Deleting a mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Inserting an SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Playing back the same passage repeatedly
Inserting the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 (A-B repeat function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Re-recording only a specified region
Power On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 (punch-in/out function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Manual punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power-on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Auto punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Recording several tracks on a master track
(mixdown function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Let’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 About the master track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Master track mixdown steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Playing the master track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Step 1: Preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Combining multiple tracks on one or two

1.1 Creating a new project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 tracks (bounce function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.2 Selecting the rhythm pattern to use. . . . . 18 Making bounce settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Executing bounce recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Step 2: Recording the first track . . . . . . . . . . 20 Recording drum/bass sound on audio tracks
2.1 Adjusting input sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (rhythm recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2 Applying the insert effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Selecting the recording source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3 Selecting a track and recording . . . . . . . . 23 Rhythm recording procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Making settings for pre-count operation . . . 43
Step 3: Overdubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1 Making settings for input sensitivity and
insert effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2 Selecting a track and recording . . . . . . . . 25

4 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 5 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Contents

Reference [Track Editing] . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Editing rhythm patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Copying a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Editing a range of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Erasing a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Basic steps for range editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Copying a specified range of data. . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Creating a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Moving a specified range of data . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Selecting a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Erasing a specified range of data . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Entering pattern information using step input. . . . 77
Trimming a specified range of data. . . . . . . . . . . 47 Using FAST for pattern information input . . . . . . . 79
Fade-in/fade-out of specified data range . . . . . . 48 Entering chord information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reversing a specified range of audio data . . . . . 49 Entering other information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Editing using V-takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Playing a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Basic steps for V-take editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Editing a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Erasing a V-take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Copying a specified range of measures . . . . . . . 85
Copying a V-take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Transposing the entire rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . 85
Moving a V-take. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Copying a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exchanging V-takes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Erasing the rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Importing a V-take from another project . . . . . . . 52 Assigning a name to a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . 87
Track capture and swap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Importing rhythm patterns and rhythm songs
Capturing a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 from another project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Swapping track data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Editing various settings of the rhythm
section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reference [Mixer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
About the mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Changing the length of the pre-count . . . . . . . . . 89
Changing the metronome volume. . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Assigning input signals to recording Adjusting the sensitivity of the pads . . . . . . . . . . 90
tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Checking the remaining amount of memory . . . . 90
Adjusting the signal for each track Swapping the left/right pan position . . . . . . . . . . 90
(track parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Linking two tracks (stereo link) . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Reference [Effects] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
About the effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reference [Rhythm] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Using the insert effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
About the rhythm section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 About insert effect patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Drum kits and bass programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Changing the insert location of the insert
Rhythm patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Selecting the patch for the insert effect . . . . . . . 93
Rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song Editing an insert effect patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Storing or swapping insert effect patches . . . . . 98
Playing rhythm patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Assigning a name to an insert effect patch. . . . . 98
Selecting a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Applying the insert effect only to the monitor
Changing the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Changing the drum kit / bass program . . . . . . . . 64 Using the send/return effect . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using the pads to play drum/bass sounds . . . . . 64 About the send/return effect patches . . . . . . . . . 100
Creating a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Selecting a send/return effect patch . . . . . . . . . . 100
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Editing a send/return effect patch. . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Drum sequence real-time input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Storing or swapping send/return effect
Bass sequence real-time input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Drum sequence step input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Assigning a name to a send/return effect
Bass sequence step input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Entering rhythm pattern chord information . . . . . 73 Importing patches from another project . . . . 102
Changing the drum/bass sequence volume
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Assigning a name to a rhythm pattern. . . . . . . . . 75

ZOOM MRS-8 5
MRS-8(E).book 6 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Contents

Reference [Projects]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

About projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Problems during playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Working with projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Problems during recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Problems with effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Loading a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Problems with the rhythm section . . . . . . . 121
Creating a new project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Copying a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Problems with MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Erasing a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Other problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Changing the project name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Protecting a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Reference [MIDI] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Effect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
About MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
What you can do using MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Send/return Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Making MIDI-related settings . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Effect Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting the drum kit/bass program MIDI Send/return Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Turning Timing Clock messages on or off. . . . . 109
Drum Kits/Bass Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Turning Song Position Pointer messages on or
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Instrument/MIDI note number chart . . . . . . 142
Turning Start/Stop/Continue messages on or Files on SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 MIDI implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Turning MIDI Time Code (MTC) messages on or
MIDI implementation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Reference [Other Functions] . . . . . . . 111
Playing several projects continuously
(sequence play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating a playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Playing a playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Using the tuner function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using the chromatic tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using other tuning types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Switching the level meter display type . . . . 116
Adjusting the display contrast and
backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Changing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Formatting an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Checking the available SD card capacity/
project size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 7 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Introduction
Thank you for selecting the ZOOM MRS-8 MultiTrak Recording Studio (simply called the “MRS-8” in this manual).
The MRS-8 is a fascinating product with the following features.

• Four major functions in a compact unit

The MRS-8 combines an 8-track SD card recorder, effect device, digital mixer, and drum/bass machine in a single
unit of amazingly compact dimensions. Everything you need to create music is right there. Use it to pre-produce a
song at home or take it into the studio for some serious recording work. The MRS-8 is a great tool that will go
anywhere.
• Versatile input configuration handles a wide variety of sources
In addition to the standard phone type jack, the MRS-8 features a combo type connector that can handle XLR plug
leads (balanced) as well as phone plug leads (balanced and unbalanced). Guitar, bass, synthesizer and various other
sources as well as microphones and direct boxes can be connected easily. A high-performance microphone is also
built in, which is great for recording acoustic guitar or vocals.
• Recorder with 8 tracks x 10 virtual takes
The recorder section provides four mono tracks and two stereo tracks, resulting in a total of eight tracks. Each track
has ten virtual tracks (V-takes). A bounce function lets you play all tracks and record the result on an empty V-take.

• Dedicated master track for mixdown

The master track is separate from the regular recording tracks and is optimized for mixdown with a minimum of
fuss. A sequence play function lets you play the master tracks of multiple songs in succession, which is convenient
for moving mixed-down songs onto an external recorder in one go.
• Full-function mixer
The built-in digital mixer handles the audio tracks and drum/bass sounds and allows adjusting parameters such as
level, panning, EQ, and effect intensity. The result is a full-fledged stereo mix to which the input signal can also be
added.
• Two versatile effects
The MRS-8 provides an insert effect for processing the input signal and/or any track, and a send/return effect that
is used via the mixer send/return loop. The insert effect can be used as mastering effect for the stereo mix, for
adjusting the sound pressure and tonal quality during mixdown.
• Rhythm section can be used to provide guide rhythm or accompaniment
Realistic PCM sources produce drum and bass sounds that can be played in more than 500 rhythm patterns. By
programming a combination of patterns and setting a chord progression, you can build the rhythm accompaniment
to an entire song.
• Compatible with system-wide synchronization
The MIDI OUT connector can supply synchronization messages such as MIDI time code information and MIDI
clock information. In combination with a computer, MIDI sequencer or similar device, this lets you create a system
with professional-level synchronization.

• Built-in tuner with support for various tuning methods

Besides the standard chromatic type, the tuner function of the MRS-8 also caters for 7-string guitar, 5-string bass,
and other special tuning needs.

In order to take full advantage of the MRS-8’s versatile functions and to ensure trouble-free enjoyment, please
read this manual carefully. Keep this manual in a safe place together with the warranty card.

ZOOM MRS-8 7
MRS-8(E).book 8 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Introducing the MRS-8

The MRS-8 is internally divided into the following four sections.

● Recorder
Records and plays back audio signals. Recorder
● Rhythm section
Uses the internal drum/bass sound source to play The recorder section of the MRS-8 has eight audio tracks.
rhythms. (A “track” is a separate section for recording audio data.)
There are four mono tracks (track 1 – 4) and two stereo
● Mixer tracks (tracks 5/6 and 7/8). Up to 2 tracks can be recorded
Mixes the signals from the recorder and the drum/bass simultaneously and up to 8 tracks can be played back
sound source into a stereo signal, for output via the output simultaneously.
jacks and for mixdown on dedicated master tracks.
Each of the tracks has ten switchable virtual tracks (called
● Effects “V-takes”). For each track, one V-take can be selected for
Process input signals, recorder playback signals, or drum/ recording/playback.
bass sound source signals in various ways, to achieve
various sound characteristics.

The following diagram shows the relationship and signal

flow between each section.

Recorder
INPUT 1
Track 1
or MASTER OUTPUT
Track 2
Built-in Track 3
mic Insert Track 4
effect
Tracks 5/6
INPUT 2
Tracks 7/8

From immediately To immediately

after [MASTER] fader Master Track before
[MASTER] fader

Rhythm section To
master
Drum sound source track

Bass sound source

DRUM BASS 1 2 3 4 5/6 7/8 MASTER

Send/return effect

Mixer
From master track

8 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 9 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Introducing the MRS-8

Currently selected V-take on tracks 1 – 8 Mixer

and master track

V-take
The playback signals from the audio tracks and the drum/
1 bass sounds are sent to the built-in digital mixer to create
2 a stereo mix. For each track/sound, parameters such as
3
4 volume, panning, and 2-band EQ (Hi and Lo) can be
5
6 controlled independently.
7 The resulting stereo mix is sent to the output jacks and
8
9 can be sent to an empty V-take of the master track or any
10
1 2 3 4 5/6 7/8
other tracks, for mixdown and bounce operation.
Master track
Tracks

The recorder section also provides a set of stereo tracks Effects

which are separate from the normal audio tracks. This is
called the master track. The master track is reserved for
use in mixdown.
The MRS-8 provides two types of effects: insert effect
and send/return effect. These effects have the
characteristics described below.
Rhythm section
■ Insert effect
The MRS-8 contains a rhythm section that operates in This effect can be inserted at one of the following three
sync with the recorder. It offers 511 accompaniment points in the signal path.
patterns (called “rhythm patterns”) that use the internal
d r u m / b a s s s o u n d g e n e r a t o r. Yo u c a n u s e t h e (1) Immediately after the input
preprogrammed patterns, modify them in part, or create (2) In the output of any audio track or drum
entirely new patterns from scratch. track/bass sound
(3) Immediately before the [MASTER] fader

Recorder
In the default condition, position (1) (immediately after
Track 1
Track 2 input) is selected. When the setting is changed to (2), only
Track 3 a selected track or drum/bass sound is processed by the
effect. When the setting is changed to (3), the final stereo
Rhythm section mix can be processed.

Drum sound To mixer

Rhythm Rhythm
pattern pattern
Rhythm
pattern
■ Send/return effect
Bass sound To mixer
This effect is internally connected to the send/return loop
of the mixer section. The effect includes reverb, chorus
and other processing types.
HINT The level of the signal supplied to the send/return effect
The drum/bass sound sources can be also played with the (send level) for each track/sound adjusts the depth of the
pads on the top panel. effect. Raising the send level will produce a deeper effect
for that track or sound.
You can arrange rhythm patterns in the desired order of
playback, and program chords and tempo to create the
rhythm accompaniment for an entire song. (This is called
a “rhythm song”.) Up to 10 rhythm songs can be created,
among which one is selected for editing/playback.

ZOOM MRS-8 9
MRS-8(E).book 10 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Names of Parts
Front panel

Input section Display section Control section

Effect
section

Rhythm
section

Built-in mic Fader section Transport section

Input section Rhythm section

[INPUT] controls 1/2 [SONG/PATTERN] key
[DRUM/BASS] key
[PEAK] indicators
[TEMPO] key

[MIC] key

Pads 1 – 9
INPUT [ON/OFF] keys 1/2

Effect section

[INSERT EFFECT] key [INPUT SRC] key

[SEND/RETURN] key

10 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 11 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Names of Parts

Display section Control section

[SD CARD ACCESS] indicator MARKER [U] / [I] keys
Display [AUTO PUNCH I/O] key
[BOUNCE] key

[A-B REPEAT] key

[MARK/CLEAR] key

[SYSTEM/UTILITY] key [TRACK PARAMETER] key [FUNCTION] key

[EDIT] key [EXIT] key
[NEW PROJECT] key

Dial
Fader section
Status keys
([RHYTHM], 1 – 4, 5/6, 7/8, [MASTER]) Cursor keys
[ENTER] key

Transport section
REW [T] key
ZERO [U] key FF [Y] key

Faders ([RHYTHM], 1 – 4, 5/6, 7/8, [MASTER]) STOP [P] key REC [O] key
PLAY [R] key

Rear panel

MASTER INPUT 1/2

MIDI OUT OUTPUT jacks connectors
DC 9V jack connector PHONES jack

[POWER ON/OFF] Card slot [PHONES] [INPUT 1 SELECT]

switch volume control switch

ZOOM MRS-8 11
MRS-8(E).book 12 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Connections

The INPUT 1 connector accepts a standard phone

plug cable (unbalanced). The INPUT 2 connector
accepts an XLR plug cable (balanced) or a phone
MIDI sequencer (computer etc.) plug cable (balanced or unbalanced).
Guitar
When a passive electric guitar/bass or other
instrument with high output impedance is
connected to INPUT 1, set the [INPUT 1 SELECT]
switch to GUITAR/BASS.
When an active electric guitar/bass, a dynamic
MIDI interface microphone, synthesizer or other device with low
output impedance is connected to INPUT 1, set
the [INPUT 1 SELECT] switch to MIC/LINE. Bass
MIDI IN

Rear panel Dynamic or condenser microphone

To power the MRS-8 from

an AC outlet, be sure to use
only the ZOOM AD-0006
(available separately). Using
another AC adapter can R L
lead to malfunction and
AC adapter damage.

Loop the cable of the AC adapter around

the hook as shown in the diagram before
connecting it to the [DC 12V] jack. This Synthesizer or sampler etc.
will prevent the plug from being pulled out When connecting stereo output devices
if the AC adaptor cable is accidentally such as a synthesizer or CD player, connect
pulled. the L output of the external device to INPUT
1 and the R output to INPUT 2.

To monitor the sound with headphones,

connect a pair of headphones to the
PHONES jack. The listening volume can
Headphones be adjusted with the PHONES control.

To prevent damage to the speakers of your

monitor system, turn off the power of the
system connected to the output jacks (or
turn the volume all the way down) before
you make connections.

Monitor system (audio components or amplified speakers etc.)

12 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 13 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Inserting SD Card and Batteries

Inserting an SD card Inserting the batteries

For operating the MRS-8, an SD card or a miniSD card The MRS-8 can be powered from batteries. Purchase the
with adapter (capacity 16 MB or more) must be inserted correct batteries and insert them as described below.
as storage media. Before inserting a card, verify that the
write protect feature is turned off. Make sure that power 1. Turn the unit over and open the battery
to the MRS-8 is turned off, and then insert the card as compartment cover.
shown below.

IEC R6 (size AA) battery x 4

MRS-8 bottom view

Battery compartment

2. Insert four IEC R6 (size AA) batteries into

the compartment. (Use alkaline batteries.)

3. Close the battery compartment cover.

SD card NOTE
If you are operating the unit on battery power and the
indication [ ] appears in the bottom right of the
When inserting the card, push it all the way into the slot.
display, the batteries are almost exhausted. Replace all four
To remove the card, turn power off and then pull the card
batteries with fresh ones as soon as possible.
out.
To remove or insert a card with the power turned on, be
sure to follow the procedure described on page 117.
Otherwise data may be permanently destroyed.

NOTE
• If the card is inserted with wrong orientation, it will not go all
the way in. Never try to force the card, as this may damage it.

ZOOM MRS-8 13
MRS-8(E).book 14 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Power On/Off
To turn the MRS-8 on and off, follow the steps described below.

complete, the main screen appears.

Power-on
HINT
1. Make sure that the MRS-8 and peripheral • You can also format an SD card after the MRS-8 has started
up, as described on page 118.
equipment is turned off.
• Changing the SD card while the MRS-8 is operating is
Turn down the volume controls of connected equipment, possible by following the procedure described on page 117.
the MRS-8, and the monitor system.
4. Turn on the connected instrument and the
2. Insert an SD card into the card slot.
monitor system in that order.

3. Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch of the

MRS-8 to ON.

Power-off

1. Turn down the volume at the monitor

system.

2. Turn off the monitor system and the

connected instrument in that order.

Data loading for the inserted SD card starts. During this 3. Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch of the
interval, the [SD CARD ACCESS] indicator lights up. MRS-8 to OFF.
The indication “GoodBye See You!” appears on the
display and the unit is turned off. Any settings and other
information are stored automatically on the SD card.

After a while, the following screen appears.

PRJ 000
MRS-8 SD • Never turn power on or off by connecting or
0 0 0 1- 1- 0 disconnecting the AC adapter. Otherwise data
may be destroyed.
This is called the main screen. From this screen, you can • In particular, if you disconnect the AC adapter
access various recording and playback functions. while the [SD CARD ACCESS] indicator is lit,
all data may be permanently destroyed.

HINT
To return to the main screen from other screens, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly.

If an SD card that is not ready for use in the MRS-8 is

inserted, the indication “FORMAT?” appears when you
turn the MRS-8 on. If you press the [ENTER] key at this
point, the SD card will be formatted. When formatting is

14 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 15 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Let’s Record
This section demonstrates the basics of recording and playback with the MRS-8. As an example, we explain how to record
an electric guitar connected to the INPUT 1 connector.

1. Connect the guitar to the INPUT 1

connector and set the [INPUT 1 SELECT] Flickers occasionally
switch to GUITAR/BASS (for a passive
guitar) or MIC/LINE (for an active guitar).

2. Press the [NEW PROJECT] key in the

display section. Verify that the indication
“PRJNOxxx (where xxx is the project
number) is shown on the first line of the
display. Then press the [ENTER] key. 5. Press the [TRACK PARAMETER] key in the
display section, and use the cursor left/
right keys to bring up the indication
“INPUT” on the first line of the display.

A new project is created, and the unit goes into recording

standby mode. If necessary, you can edit the project name
in this condition (→ p. 105).
NOTE
3. Verify that the [MIC] key is flashing or out. If “INPUT” is not shown on the first line of the display, check
Then press the INPUT [ON/OFF] key 1 so whether the INPUT [ON/OFF] key is lit.
that the key is lit.
In this condition, the INPUT 1 connector is active. 6. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up
the following indication on the display.
From this screen, you can adjust the input signal
recording level (the signal level sent to the track).

INPUT
REC LVL 100

Recording level setting

HINT
If the [MIC] key is lit, the built-in microphone is active instead 7. Turn the dial to adjust the recording level.
of the INPUT 1 connector. In such a case, press the [MIC] key
once to switch the key to flashing status.

4. While playing your guitar, use the [INPUT]

control 1 to adjust the input sensitivity.
Make the adjustment so that the [PEAK] indicator
flickers slightly when you play your instrument at its
The current signal level can be checked using the meter
loudest volume.

ZOOM MRS-8 15
MRS-8(E).book 16 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Let’s Record

in the lower part of the display. Adjust the recording level your instrument along with the rhythm pattern.
so that the 0 (dB) segment for IN 1 flashes slightly when
the guitar is at maximum volume.

0 (dB) segment Lit in green Lit in red

HINT
Input 1 recording level
• If you do not want a rhythm pattern, select an empty rhythm
pattern (→ p. 18) or mute the drum/bass sound (→ p. 19).
8. Press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to return to • In the default condition of a project, the insert effect
the main screen. processes the input signal. You can bypass the effect
(→ p. 22) or select another effect patch (→ p. 21).

12. When recording is complete, press the

STOP [P] key.

9. Press status key 1 repeatedly until the key

is lit in red.
When a status key is lit in red, the respective audio track
(track 1 in this example) is selected as recording
destination. The REC [ O ] key and PLAY [ R ] key go out, and
recording stops.

Lit in red
13. To check the recorded contents, press the
ZERO [U] key and then press the PLAY [R]
key.

10. Operate fader 1 and the [MASTER] fader to

adjust the input signal monitor level.
Faders 1 – 4, 5/6, and 7/8 adjust the volume for the
respective track. When the input signal is sent to a track,
the monitor level can be adjusted. The [MASTER] fader By operating the [MASTER] fader you can adjust the
can be used to adjust the final output level. volume of the entire song (stereo mix signal level).

14. To cancel the recording condition, press

the status key 1 so that the key is lit in
green.

Lit in green

11. To start recording, press the PLAY [R] key

while holding down the REC [O] key.
A four-beat pre-count is heard, and recording starts. In
the default condition of a project, an 8-beat rhythm
pattern is played during recording and playback. Play

16 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 17 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour
Now let’s use your MRS-8 to do some actual recording. This Quick Tour describes the five steps that cover the entire
process from preparation until the completion of a song.

• Step 1: Preparations
Shows how to create a new project, select a guide rhythm, Step 1: Preparations
and perform other steps necessary for recording.

• Step 2: Recording the first track

Shows how to record the first track while using the insert
1.1 Creating a new project
effect on the input signal.
On the MRS-8, song data are managed in units called
• Step 3: Overdubbing
“projects”. A project comprises recorded audio data as
Shows how to record further tracks while listening to a
well as various rhythm and effect settings. By loading a
track already recorded (overdubbing).
project, the same condition as when the song was last
saved can be recreated.
• Step 4: Mixing
Shows how to adjust the level, panning, and EQ of each
To start recording with the MRS-8, you must first create
track, apply the send/return effect, and mix the recorded
a project.
material to a pair of stereo tracks.
1. Connect the instrument to record and the
• Step 5: Mixdown
monitor system to the MRS-8 (→ p. 12).
Finally the completed stereo mix is recorded on the
master track to create the finished song.
2. Insert the SD card to use for recording
(→ p. 13).

3. Turn power on in the order MRS-8 →

monitor system.
When the MRS-8 starts up, the last handled project is
automatically loaded.

4. Press the [NEW PROJECT] key in the

display section.
When you press the [NEW PROJECT] key from the main
screen, the display changes as follows.

PRJNo001 Cursor keys that

be used
PRJ001
In this condition, a new project can be created.

The top right of the display shows the cursor keys that can
be used on this screen.

ZOOM MRS-8 17
MRS-8(E).book 18 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

HINT
• When creating a new project, the lowest free project number Rhythm pattern number
is automatically selected.
• It is also possible to create a new project from the project 001#117
MTNs1Vb 1
menu (→ p. 105).
Rhythm pattern name
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
A new project is created, and the main screen for audio
track recording/playback appears. HINT
To return to the main screen from other screens, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly. The [EXIT] key always serves to return
to the previous screen.
PRJ 001
PRJ001 2. Turn the dial to select a pattern to use as
guide rhythm.

HINT
• When selecting a different project or creating a new project,
the project you were working on up to that point is
automatically saved.
• When performing the power-off procedure for the MRS-8
(→ p. 14), the last project is automatically saved.
• When creating a new project, you can edit the project name Up to 511 types of rhythm pattern can be used in a
(→ p. 105). project. (More than 450 of these are preprogrammed.)
You select a pattern by turning the dial.

NOTE When you turn the dial to select another rhythm pattern
While the MRS-8 is operating, do not remove the SD card.
while a pattern is playing, the new pattern will start after
Otherwise data may be destroyed and malfunction may
the current pattern has finished. When you select a new
occur. If you want to remove the SD card while the MRS-8 is
on, be sure to follow the correct procedure (→ p. 117).
pattern with the cursor up/down keys, the new pattern
begins playing immediately.

1.2 Selecting the rhythm In this example, we will select a simple rhythm pattern as
pattern to use guide rhythm for use during recording. If you select for
example the rhythm pattern number 510, a 4/4-beat
The MRS-8 has a built-in rhythm function that operates metronome sound is heard.
in sync with the recorder. This lets you use drum sounds
(drum kits) and bass sounds (bass programs) to create 3. Set the [MASTER] fader to 0 (dB) and press
repeated rhythm patterns of several measures. By the PLAY [R] key in the transport section.
combining various patterns, you can create the rhythm
accompaniment for an entire song (rhythm song).
This section explains how to select a rhythm pattern for
use as guide rhythm during recording.

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ 0dB

PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key
goes out.
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears.
The selected rhythm pattern is played in sync with the
recorder operation. The [TEMPO] key flashes according
to the current tempo setting.

18 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 19 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

In the default condition of a project, the sound the bass • When drum track is selected
program (bass track) is muted. Therefore only the drum
kit (drum track) is heard when the rhythm pattern plays.

HINT
During rhythm pattern play, the pads corresponding to the Lit
currently produced sound of the drum kit (or pitch of the bass
program) are flashing. You can also tap the pads to play the
drum sounds/bass notes.

• When bass track is selected

4. To change the tempo, press the [TEMPO]
key in the rhythm section and then turn the
dial to change the tempo value shown on
the display.

Out

TEMPO
BPM= 1200

Tempo value

The signal level of the respective channel can be checked

with the level meter in the lower part of the display.

The tempo value can be set in 0.1 BPM steps. When the
setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to return to the
Bass track signal level
previous screen.
Drum track signal level

HINT In the same way, the [DRUM/BASS] key can be used to

You can also set the tempo by hitting the [TEMPO] key
select the sound (drum or bass), and then the [RHYTHM]
repeatedly.
status key can be used to control muting on/off for the
drum track/bass track.
5. To adjust the volume of the drum/bass
track, use the [DRUM/BASS] key in the
6. To stop playback, press the STOP [P]key in
rhythm section to select the sound (drum or
the transport section.
bass), and then operate the [RHYTHM]
fader.
The [RHYTHM] fader serves for controlling either the
drum track or the bass track. When the key is lit, the drum
track is selected. When the key is out, the bass track is
selected. The [RHYTHM] fader then controls the
respective level. 7. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 19
MRS-8(E).book 20 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

is selected as input source.

Step 2: Recording the first To use two input sources simultaneously, hold down one
INPUT [ON/OFF] key while pressing the other one.
track

In this step, we explain how to select an audio track for

recording, how to record while listening to the guide
rhythm of the rhythm section, and how to use the insert
effect on the input signal.

2.1 Adjusting input sensitivity

The INPUT [ON/OFF] keys 1/2 and [MIC] key lighting
1. Connect an instrument to the INPUT 1/2 status with various input selections is shown below.
connector.
The MRS-8 can handle up to two input sources at a time, • Input source = INPUT 1 connector
from INPUT 1, INPUT 2, and the built-in mic.
INPUT 1 and the built-in mic are mutually exclusive. A
switch selects one of these for use as input source.
Lit Flashing Out
2. To use the built-in mic, press the [MIC] key or out
in the input section so that the key is lit.
• Input source = INPUT 2 connector

Out Flashing Lit

or out

• Input source = Built-in mic

When the unit is in a mode where the built-in mic can be
used, the [MIC] key in the input section flashes. If you
press the key so that it is lit, the built-in mic will be active
Lit Lit Out
instead of INPUT 1.
Depending on the insert effect settings, the built-in mic
may not be available. In this case, the [MIC] key is out. • Input source = INPUT 1 connector + INPUT 2
connector
[MIC]
[MIC] key
key [MIC]
[MIC] key
key [MIC]
[MIC] key
key
lit
lit flashing
flashing out
out

Lit Flashing Lit

Built-in
Built-in mic
mic is
is Built-in
Built-in mic
mic is
is Built-in
Built-in mic
mic is
is or out
active
active available
available not available
not available
(INPUT 1
(INPUT 1 isis (INPUT 1
(INPUT 1 isis (INPUT 1
(INPUT 1 isis
inactive)
inactive) active)
active) active)
active)
• Input source = Built-in mic + INPUT 2
connector

3. Use the INPUT [ON/OFF] keys 1/2 to select

the input source.
The INPUT [ON/OFF] keys 1/2 control the INPUT 1 Lit Lit Lit
connector (or built-in mic) and INPUT 2 connector
respectively. When a key is lit, the signal from that input

20 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 21 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

4. While playing your instrument, adjust the another setting is currently displayed, turn the dial to
[INPUT] control for the input(s) selected in select “IN”.
step 2, to adjust the input sensitivity.
The sensitivity of INPUT 1 and the built-in mic is
adjusted with the [INPUT] 1 control. The sensitivity of
IN SRC
IN
INPUT 2 is adjusted with the [INPUT] 2 control.
Make adjustments so that the [PEAK] indicator in the
input section flickers slightly when you play your 2. Press the [INSERT EFFECT] key in the
instrument at its loudest volume. effect section.

Flickers
occasionally

The display changes as follows. From this screen, you

can select the insert effect algorithm (combination of
effect modules used simultaneously) and patch (effect
program).
0 (dB) segment

Algorithm name

Input 1 recording level CLEAN

Standard 0

The input signal level can be checked with the level meter Patch name Patch number

IN 1/IN 2 bars in the display.

The MRS-8 has eight algorithms with multiple patch
selections for each algorithm. To use the insert effect,
2.2 Applying the insert effect select the algorithm first and then call up one of the
patches in that algorithm.
The insert effect can be applied to a point immediately
after the input, to the output of any track, or immediately
3. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the
before the [MASTER] fader. The insert effect actually is
algorithm.
a multi-effect unit that contains a number of single effects
(effect modules) such as compressor, distortion, and
delay, connected in series.
When you apply the insert effect to the input signal, you
can record the processed signal on a track. The following
steps show how to apply an insert effect suitable for
guitar/bass. The following algorithms are available.

1. Press the [INPUT SRC] key in the effect • CLEAN

section. • DIST
• ACO/BASS SIM (shown on the display as “Ac/
BsSIM”)
• BASS
These algorithms are suitable for recording guitar/bass.

The indication “IN” (input) appears on the second line of • MIC

the display. In this condition, you can select the insert An algorithm suitable for vocals and other microphone
effect position. recordings.
In the default condition of a patch, “IN” is selected. If

ZOOM MRS-8 21
MRS-8(E).book 22 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

• LINE
HINT
An algorithm suitable mainly for recording line-level
When “EMPTY” is shown as the patch name, the patch is
output instruments such as synthesizer or electric piano.
empty. Selecting such a patch will have no effect.
• Dual MIC
An algorithm for two entirely separate mono input and
mono output channels, for use with two microphones.
NOTE
Depending on the selected algorithm, the input/output signal
• MASTERING (shown on the display as routing will change (→ p. 94).
“MASTRING”)
An algorithm suitable for processing the final stereo 5. To adjust the signal level recorded on a
mixdown signal. track, press the [TRACK PARAMETER] key
in the control section and then press the
INPUT [ON/OFF] key.
HINT
In the default condition of a project, the CLEAN algorithm is
selected for the insert effect.

NOTE
When a patch of the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, or BASS
algorithms is selected, the built-in mic cannot be used. But
when the insert effect is temporarily bypassed, when
“CABINET” is selected on the PRE AMP/DRIVE module, or
when the module is turned off, you can use the built-in mic.

4. Set the [MASTER] fader to 0 (dB). While

playing your instrument to check the
The insert effect output level may change according to the
sound, use the dial to select the patch.
selected patch. When recording with the insert effect
applied, you will have to adjust the recording level
according to the selected patch.

6. Press the cursor down key repeatedly to

bring up the indication “REC LVL” on the
0 dB
second line of the display.
The display changes as follows. The REC LVL parameter
shown on this screen indicates the signal level after
passing the insert effect, which will be recorded on the
300 patches can be used with the insert effect. The effect
track.
type and intensity for a patch can be adjusted as needed.
The patches available with the different algorithms are
listed below. INPUT
REC LVL 100
Algorithm Patch number
CLEAN 0 – 29
DIST 0 – 49
7. Turn the dial to adjust the recording level.
ACO/BASS SIM 0 – 19
BASS 0 – 19
8. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key.
MIC 0 – 49
LINE 0 – 49
DUAL MIC 0 – 49 HINT
MASTERING 0 – 29 • To record without using the insert effect, press the [INSERT
EFFECT] key in the effect section repeatedly until the key goes
out. While the key is out, the insert effect is bypassed.

22 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 23 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

• When the insert effect is bypassed for recording, setting the When a status key is red, the track is in the recording
REC LVL parameter to 100 (default) results in unity gain (the standby condition and the input signal is assigned to that
recording level same as the input level). track.
If a mono track (1 – 4) has been selected as recording
track, the signal routing will be as follows.
2.3 Selecting a track and
Mono track selected
recording 1 MASTER

One Input source Track 1

Now we will select a track and record the input sound
Track 2
(with the insert effect applied) on that track.

1. From the main screen, repeatedly press the 1 MASTER

status key of the recording track until the Two Input sources
Track 1
key is lit in red. Track 2

Lit in red
If a stereo track has been selected as recording track, the
signal routing will change as shown below. Except for the
V-take selection, the parameters for left/right stereo
tracks are set to the same values. This is useful for
recording from a stereo source such as a synthesizer or
CD player.

The audio track status keys are used to select the

Stereo track selected
recording track and to switch muting for each track on
7/8 MASTER
and off. Each time you press a status key, the key will
cycle through the following states. Two Input sources
Track 7／8

Status key
Lit in green Out Lit in red
HINT
Mute off Mute on Selected as • You can select up to two tracks for recording, either one
recording track stereo track or two mono tracks. To select two mono tracks,
press the first status key of an odd/even-numbered pair so
that it is lit in red, and then hold down that key and press the
When all status keys are green, the input signal will not
other key so that it also is lit in red.
be sent to the tracks and will go directly to the
• If the input signal is mono, selecting a pair of stereo tracks as
[MASTER] fader. (Panning and send/return effect depth target will ensure that the left/right spread added by certain
can be adjusted in this case.) insert effect settings is preserved in recording.

Recording track not selected

MASTER
2. Set the fader for the recording track and the
[MASTER] fader to 0 (dB). Then adjust the
One Input source Track 1 volume of the monitor system while playing
Track 2 your instrument.

MASTER 3. To begin recording, press the ZERO [U]

Two Input sources Track 1 key to return to the beginning of the song.
Track 2 Then hold down the REC [O] key and press
the PLAY [R] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 23
MRS-8(E).book 24 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

The track will be played back together with the selected

Both keys light up, and a pre-count of 4 beats is heard. guide rhythm from the rhythm section.
Then recording will begin. Record the first instrument
track while listening to the guide rhythm from the rhythm
section. HINT
• You can specify a position in minutes/seconds/milliseconds
or measures/beats/ticks and move directly to that point ( → p.
HINT 35).
• The number and the sound of the pre-count clicks can be • By setting marks at the desired points, you can quickly jump
changed (→ p. 43). to these points (→ p. 35).
• If the input signal is distorted, refer to steps 2.1 and 2.2 to
readjust the input sensitivity and recording level. 6. To stop playback, press the STOP [P] key.
To redo the recording, repeat steps 3 – 5.
4. When you have finished recording, press
the STOP [P] key. 7. When you are satisfied with the recorded
The REC [ O ] key and PLAY [ R ] key go out, and content, press the status key of the
recording will stop. The indication “wait...” is briefly recording track until it is lit in green.
shown on the display, and then the main screen reappears. The recording standby condition of the track is canceled.

HINT HINT
The duration of the “wait...” period may differ. Never turn • A recorded track can be copied, deleted, or edited ( → p. 44).
power to the unit off while “wait...” is being shown on the • By switching the V-take for the track on which you have
display. Otherwise recorded data may be lost and damage to recorded, you can record again on the track without erasing
the unit may occur. the current recording.

5. To listen to the recorded content, press the

ZERO [U] key to return to the beginning of
the song (counter zero position), and then
press the PLAY [R] key.

Basic operation of transport keys

REW [T] key
Moves the current position back in 1-second steps. Movement speed can be
increased by holding down the REW [T] key and pressing the FF [Y] key.

ZERO [U] key FF [Y] key

Returns the recorder to the Moves the current position forward in 1-second steps.
start position (counter zero Movement speed can be increased by holding down
position). the FF [Y] key and pressing the REW [T] key.

STOP [P] key REC [O] key

Stops the recorder. If you press the PLAY [R] key while holding down this
key, recording starts. Pressing the key during
PLAY [R] key playback causes punch-in and pressing the key
Starts recorder playback during recording causes punch-out (→p. 37).
from the current position.

24 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 25 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

Then hold down the REC [O] key and press

Step 3: Overdubbing the PLAY [R] key.
After the pre-count, recording on the new track will
begin. Record your instrument while listening to the
In this step, you will learn how to record another guide rhythm and the recorded track.
instrument on another track, while listening to the content
you recorded in step 2. Adding parts in this way is called 4. When you have finished recording, press
“overdubbing”. the STOP [P] key.
The indication “wait...” is briefly shown on the display,
3.1 Making settings for input and then the main screen reappears.

sensitivity and insert 5. To check the recorded content, press the

effect ZERO [U] key once more to return to the
beginning of the song, and press the PLAY
As in step 2, select the input source, adjust input
[R] key.
sensitivity and recording level, and make settings for the
The guide rhythm of the rhythm section and the
insert effect.
previously recorded track will be played back along with
the newly recorded track. Use the faders as necessary to
1. Connect the next instrument you want to
adjust the level balance.
record, and adjust input sensitivity in the
same way as in step 2.1.
6. To stop playback, press the STOP [P] key.

2. Select the algorithm and patch for the

insert effect in the same way as in step 2.2. HINT
To redo the recording, repeat steps 3 – 5. You can also start
3. When the setting is complete, press the rerecording from partly into the track and use the punch-in/
[EXIT] key to return to the main screen. punch-out function (→ p. 37) to redo a limited passage only.

7. When you are satisfied with the recorded

3.2 Selecting a track and content, press the status key of the
recording recording track until it is lit in green.
The recording condition for that track is turned off. You
Now you’re ready to record the second instrument on can now record more tracks in the same way.
another track, while listening to the content of the first
track and the guide rhythm.
HINT
The maximum number of tracks that can be recorded is 8.
1. Repeatedly press the status key of the But even when all 8 tracks have been filled, you can still use
track on which to record, until the key is lit the bounce function (also called ping-pong recording) to
in red. move the contents from multiple tracks onto 1 or 2 tracks.
This track is now in the recording standby condition. Then you can select another V-take for the bounce source
Verify that the status key of the recorded track and the tracks and record more (→ p. 40).
[RHYTHM] status key are lit in green.

2. Set the [MASTER] fader to 0 (dB) and use

the fader of the recording track to adjust
the monitoring level.
If necessary, set the recorder to playback and operate the
faders to adjust the monitor level balance between the
recorded track and the track to record.

3. To begin recording, press the ZERO [U]

key to return to the beginning of the song.

ZOOM MRS-8 25
MRS-8(E).book 26 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

NOTE
Step 4: Mixing In some cases, the current fader position may not match the
volume setting value for a track stored in a project (such as
when the fader was moved for another project and then the
When you have finished recording all tracks, you can use
previous project was called again). In such a case, the
the built-in mixer to adjust parameters such as volume
volume may not change until the fader setting has been
level, EQ (equalizer), and panning (stereo left/right changed to a certain extent.
positioning) to create the stereo mix.
2. If an input signal is not required, press the
4.1 Adjusting volume, lit INPUT [ON/OFF] key so that the key goes
out.
panning, and EQ
While the INPUT [ON/OFF] key is lit, the signal from
that input will be added to the stereo mix. If the input
Adjust the volume, panning, and equalization for each
signal is not required, the key should be turned off.
track by controlling the track parameters of the built-in
mixer.
3. To adjust EQ and panning for each track,
press the [TRACK PARAMETER] key in the
1. To adjust the volume balance between
display section.
tracks, operate the faders in the fader
section. You now can adjust various track parameters such as
equalization and panning for each track.
By operating the faders of a pair of stereo tracks, you can
adjust the left/right level together.

4. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status

keys to select the track for which you want
to make a setting.
The status key for the currently selected track is lit in
orange.

Lit in orange
To add the drum/bass track to the mix, operate the
[RHYTHM] fader after switching the [DRUM/BASS]
key between lit (drum track selected) and out (bass track
TR2
EQ HI G 0
selected). This will adjust the drum/bass track mixing
balance.
To control the mute/on status, select the drum or bass
track with the [DRUM/BASS] key and then press the
[RHYTHM] status key. While a track parameter is shown, you can use the status
The signal level for each track can be checked with the keys and cursor left/right keys to switch tracks. The
respective bars in the display. cursor left/right keys cycle through the following
selections: drum track → bass track → audio track 1 – 8.

5. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up

the parameter that you want to adjust.

Track 1 – 8 signal level TR2

PAN 0

26 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 27 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

The parameters that can be selected for tracks 1 – 8 and

for drum/bass track are listed in the table below.

■ Track parameter list

Parameter Display Setting range Description

EQ HI GAIN EQ HI G -12 – +12dB Adjusts high frequency EQ boost/cut.
EQ HI FREQUENCY EQ HI F 500 – 18000(Hz) Selects turnover frequency for high frequency EQ.
EQ LOW GAIN EQ LO G -12 – +12dB Adjusts low frequency EQ boost/cut.
EQ LOW FREQUENCY EQ LO F 40 – 1600(Hz) Selects turnover frequency for low frequency EQ.
EFX SEND LEVEL EFX SEND 0 – 100 Adjusts signal level sent to send/return effect.
Adjusts panning (left/right positioning) for the track. For tracks 5/6,
PAN PAN L100 – 0 – R100
7/8, and the drum track, this adjusts the left/right balance.
V-TAKE Selects the V-take to use for the track (→p. 32). x is the track number
TR x-y x=1 – 8, y=1 – 10
(tracks 1 – 8 only) and y is the V-take number.
FADER FADER 0 – 127 Adjusts the fader setting.
STEREO LINK
ST LINK ON/OFF Links the parameters for tracks 1/2 or 3/4 (→p. 60).
(tracks 1 – 4 only)

6. Turn the dial to select the setting value.

4.2 Applying the send/return
effect
HINT
By pressing the [ENTER] key while an EQ parameter or the The track signals sent to the internal mixer can be
EFX SEND LEVEL parameter is displayed, you can switch individually processed by an effect that is connected
that parameter (EQ HI, EQ LO, effect send) on and off. internally to the send/return loop of the mixer. (This is
called the send/return effect.)
7. Repeat steps 4 – 6 to adjust other
parameters.
Send SEND LEVEL
By using the cursor left/right keys or the status keys to Send/return
select other tracks, you can adjust the parameters for effect
Return DRUM BASS 1 2 7/8 MASTER

these tracks.

8. To return to the main screen, press the

[EXIT] key.

HINT
Some track parameters (EQ, panning etc.) can also be used
for the drum/bass track and input signals.
The intensity of the send/return effect can be adjusted for
each track by using the send level parameter (which
controls the signal level that is sent to the effect).
Increasing this parameter will result in stronger effect
action.

This section describes how to adjust the send level for

each track.

ZOOM MRS-8 27
MRS-8(E).book 28 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

■ Selecting the send/return effect patch 8. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key.
1. From the main screen, press the [SEND/
RETURN] key in the effect section.
HINT
The display changes as follows. From this screen, you If no recording track is selected, you can apply the insert
can select the send/return effect patch. effect to the input signal.

SEND 4.3 Applying the insert effect

VoChorus 0
to a track
Patch name Patch number
You can apply the insert effect to the output of any track
2. Turn the dial to select the patch. (audio track or drum/bass track), so that it post-processes
The send/return effect has 60 patches (of which 40 are the output signal of the track.
preprogrammed).
1. From the main screen, press the [INPUT
SRC] key in the effect section.
HINT The currently selected insert location appears on the
In the default condition of a project, the send level for the display.
send/return effect is set to zero for each track. Therefore you
need to raise the setting to verify the sound produced by the
effect. IN SRC
IN
3. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key.
2. Use the status keys or turn the dial to bring
up the track to which you want to apply the
■ Adjusting the send/return effect intensity
insert effect on the second line of the
display.
4. From the main screen, press the [TRACK The status key of the selected track lights up.
PARAMETER] key in the display section,
and then use the cursor left/right keys or
the status keys to select the track for which IN SRC
you want to adjust the send level. TR1
5. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up
the indication “EFX SEND” onto the second HINT
line of the display. If required, you can use the effect on two mono tracks. To do
this, press the status keys for an odd-numbered and even-
In this condition, you can adjust the send level for the
numbered track together, or turn the dial to select a mono
track.
track x 2 as insert target (TR 1/2, TR 3/4).

TR4 3. Press the [INSERT EFFECT] key in the

EFX SEND 0 effect section.
The screen for selecting the insert effect algorithm/patch
Send level value
appears.

6. While playing the song, turn the dial to

adjust the send level value for the track.

7. Adjust the send level for other tracks in the

same way.

28 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 29 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

Step 5: Mixdown
CLEAN
Standard 0

When the mix is ready, you can transfer it onto two tracks
to create the finished song. This procedure is called
4. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the “mixdown”.
algorithm, and turn the dial to select the For mixdown, you can either use the MASTER OUTPUT
patch. connectors and record the song on an external recorder, or
The currently selected algorithm/patch is shown on the you can record the song on the internal master track of the
display. MRS-8.
If required, switch the patch while playing the song to The master track is a dedicated pair of stereo tracks that
check the sound. When you finish checking it, stop the is separate from the normal audio tracks. When you select
song and press the [EXIT] key to return to the main the master track as recording track, the signal
screen. immediately after the [MASTER] fader is recorded.

HINT
By using the bounce function (→ p. 40), you can record the
To master
processed track on an empty V-take. This lets you retain the
track
processed sound and then apply the insert effect at another
position.

This section explains the mixdown procedure for

recording on the master track.

5.1 Using the mastering

effect
By applying the insert effect immediately before the
[MASTER] fader, you can process the stereo mix signal
for mixdown. If you select a patch of the MASTERING
algorithm, you can adjust the sound pressure and tonal
quality of the final mix during mastering.

NOTE
While the insert effect is inserted immediately before the
[MASTER] fader, you cannot use the effect for processing the
input signal or for post-processing a recorded track.

1. Press the [INPUT SRC] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 29
MRS-8(E).book 30 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

The current insert effect position is shown on the display.

5.2 Mixdown onto the master
2. Turn the dial to bring up the indication track
“MASTER” on the second line of the
After the mastering effect settings have been made,
display.
record the final mix on the master track.

IN SRC 1. From the main screen, press the ZERO [U]

MASTER key to return to the beginning of the song.

2. Press the PLAY [R] key to play the song,

The insert effect is now inserted immediately before the
and operate the [MASTER] fader to adjust
[MASTER] fader. the volume of the stereo mix.
The signal level after the [MASTER] fader can be
3. When the setting is complete, press the
checked by observing the rightmost bars of the level
[EXIT] key to return to the main screen.
meter in the display. If the 0 dB segment lights up during
play, fine-tune the signal level by turning down the
4. Press the [INSERT EFFECT] key and use
[MASTER] fader.
the cursor up/down keys to bring up the
After checking the level, press the STOP [P] key.
indication “MASTRING” on the first line of
the display.
The insert effect algorithm is switched to MASTERING.
The second line of the display shows the currently
selected patch.

Left channel signal level Right channel signal

level
MASTRING
PlusAlfa 0
3. Repeatedly press the [MASTER] status key
5. until the key lights up in red.
While playing the song, turn the dial to
select the patch.
If desired, you can edit the patch to modify the effect Lit in red
further (→ p. 95). Press repeatedly
If the sound is distorted when you apply the mastering
effect, verify that the sound of each track is not distorted
and then lower the overall fader setting.

6. When you have checked the sound, stop

the song and press the [EXIT] key.
The main screen returns.
The master track is now selected for recording.

HINT
While the [MASTER] status key is lit in red, the other tracks
can be operated normally. This lets you fine-tune the mixing
balance also at this stage.

4. Press the ZERO [U] key to return to the

beginning of the song. Then hold down the
REC [O] key and press the PLAY [R] key.
Recording on the master track starts.

30 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 31 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Quick Tour

5. When recording is completed, press the

STOP [P] key.

6. To play the master track, repeatedly press

the [MASTER] status key until it is lit in
green.

Lit in green
Press repeatedly

While the [MASTER] status key is lit in green, the master

track can be played. During this period, the signals from
all other tracks are muted. The insert and send/return
effects are also disabled.

7. Return to the beginning of the song, and

press the PLAY [R] key.
The master track is played back. The playback volume
can be adjusted with the [MASTER] fader.

8. To stop playback, press the STOP [P] key.

9. To return the tracks and effects to normal

operation, press the [MASTER] status key
so that the key goes out.
Muting of the tracks and the effect bypass condition is
canceled, and the unit reverts to the original condition.

HINT
• Like the other tracks, the master track also has 10 V-takes.
This lets you switch the V-take and create different versions
with different mixing balance (→ p. 32).
• The contents of the master track can be edited later ( → p. 44).
• You can play the master tracks of multiple projects in
succession (→ p. 111).

ZOOM MRS-8 31
MRS-8(E).book 32 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]
This chapter explains the various audio recording and playback functions.

V-takes Track number V-take number

TR 1- 1
Each audio track (1 – 8) and the master track contains ten
V-take name GTR 1- 1
virtual tracks, called “V-takes”. For each track, you can
select one such take, which will be used for recording and
playback. For example, you can switch V-takes as you HINT
• If you select a V-take on which nothing is recorded, the
record multiple vocal or guitar solos on the same track,
indication “NO DATA” appears.
and later compare them and select the best V-take.
• If you select the master track, “M” is shown as the track
number.
V-takes selected for tracks 1 - 8 and master track
3. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status
V-takes keys to select the track for which to switch
1 the V-take.
2
3
4
5
6 TR 3- 1
7
8
GTR 3- 1
9
10
1 2 3 4 5/6 7/8 Master track
Tracks HINT
When you select a stereo track with a status key, each push
of the key toggles between the odd-numbered track and
even-numbered track.
HINT
For stereo tracks (tracks 5/6, 7/8), you can select a separate
V-take for the odd-numbered and even-numbered track. 4. Turn the dial to select the V-take.

5. Repeat steps 3 – 4 as necessary, to select a

Switching V-takes V-take for each track.

Here’s how to switch the V-take used by the audio tracks 6. To finish, press the [EXIT] key.
or the master track. The main screen appears again.

1. From the main screen, press the [TRACK

PARAMETER] key in the display section.
You can now select various track parameters. Changing the V-take name
2. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up A V-take that has been recorded will be automatically
the indication “TR x-yy” on the display assigned an 8-character name, according to the following
(where x is the track number and yy is the pattern. (x denotes the track number, and yy the V-take
V-take number). number.)
The V-take name is shown on the second line of the
display. • GTR x-yy
V-take recorded through CLEAN, DIST, or ACO/BS SIM
algorithm of insert effect

32 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 33 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

• BAS x-yy
V-take recorded through BASS algorithm of insert effect
TakeName
• MIC x-yy
Cursor ±TR
TR 2- 1
V-take recorded through MIC algorithm of insert effect
5. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
• LIN x-yy cursor to the character to change, and use
V-take recorded through LINE algorithm of insert effect the dial or the pads and keys in the rhythm
section to select the character.
• DUL x-yy During character input, you can use the cursor left/right
V-take recorded through DUAL MIC algorithm of insert keys to move the input position. Characters can be input
effect either by turning the dial or pressing the pads and keys of
the rhythm section, as described below.
• MAS x-yy
V-take recorded through MASTERING algorithm of • Deleting a character
insert effect Move the cursor to the character to delete, and press the
[EDIT] key. The character is deleted and subsequent
• BYP x-yy characters move one position to the left.
V-take recorded without passing through insert effect
• Entering a character with the dial
• BOU x-yy The dial changes the character under the cursor. Turn the
V-take recorded using the bounce function or rhythm dial until the desired character is shown. The following
recording function characters can be selected.

You can change the assigned name of a V-take as follows. Numerals: 0 – 9

Letters: A – Z, a – z
1. From the main screen, press the [TRACK Symbols: (space) ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
PARAMETER] key in the display section. *+,– ./:;<>
=?@[]^_`{ } \˜

2. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up • Entering a character with the rhythm section
the indication “TR x-yy” on the display pads and keys
(where x is the track number and yy is the Move the cursor to the input position and repeatedly press
V-take number). the respective pad or key to enter a numeral, letter, or
symbol. The pad/key assignments are shown below.

TR 1- 1
GTR 1- 1 Pad 8
[SONG/PATTERN] key
Symbol: x + [DRUM/BASS] key
Letter: Numeral: 0
WXYZ wxyz
3. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status Numeral: 8
[TEMPO] key
Symbol: ( )
keys to select the track for which to change
Pad 7 Pad 9
the V-take name. Letter: Symbol: !?@&
TUV tuv Numeral: 9
Numeral: 7 Pad 5
NOTE Letter:
Pad 4
MNO mno
If you select a V-take on which nothing is recorded, the Letter:
Numeral: 5
JKL jkl
indication “NO DATA” appears and the name cannot be Numeral: 4 Pad 6
edited. Letter:
Pad 1 PQRS pqrs
Letter: ABC abc Pad 2
Pad 3 Numeral: 6
4. Press the [EDIT] key. Numeral: 1
Letter: DEF def Letter: GHI ghi
The cursor (flashing box) appears on the first character of Numeral: 2 Numeral: 3
the V-take name. This indicates that you can change the
V-take name. When you press a pad or key, the character is inserted and

ZOOM MRS-8 33
MRS-8(E).book 34 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

subsequent characters move one position to the right. To By pressing another pad or key after entering a character,
clear the old name first, press the [EDIT] key repeatedly the cursor will move to the next position, without the
until all characters are erased, and then start the input need for pressing the cursor key. If the next character to
procedure. input is assigned to the same pad, you must first press the
cursor right key once to move the cursor, and then enter
When all characters are cleared and you press pad 1 the character. An example for entering “BASS” from
repeatedly, the character under the cursor changes in the scratch is shown below.
order A → B → C → 1 → A → B ...

TakeName
TakeName ±
TR 1- 1
[EDIT] key Pad 1
TakeName TakeName
± B
Press x2
Press repeatedly
Pad 1
TakeName TakeName
A B
Cursor [R] key
Pad 1
TakeName TakeName
B BA
Press x1
Pad6
TakeName TakeName
C BAS
Press x4

TakeName
1 TakeName
BAS
Cursor [R] key
TakeName Pad 6
A TakeName
BASS
Press x4
To switch between upper and lower case, press the cursor
down key. The currently selected case is indicated by the
“A” or “a” shown on the second line of the display. You NOTE
can change the case of a letter after you have already The space character and some symbols (“ # $ % ‘, – . / : ; <
input it by pressing the cursor down key immediately > = [ ] ^ _ ` { } \ ˜ ) cannot be entered with the pads and keys
afterwards. of the rhythm section.

6. Repeat step 5 to complete the desired

Upper case TakeName name.
character A Case
indication
7. To finish, press the [EXIT] key.
The main screen appears again.

Cursor down key

HINT
If the contents of a V-take are erased, the name reverts to

Lower case
TakeName “NO DATA”.

character a Case
indication

34 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 35 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

Moving to a desired point in Setting marks in a song

the song (locate function) (marker function)

Using the counter indication on the display, you can This function lets you set index information (marks) at
specify a location within the song in time units (minutes/ any position in a song. Up to 100 marks can be set in one
seconds/milliseconds) or in measure units (measures/ project. When you have specified marks, it is easy to
beats/ticks), and move to that location. jump to them at any time. This is useful to quickly repeat
playback from a certain point during a mixing operation.
Seconds Measures Ticks

Setting a mark
0 13 240 6- 2- 8

Minutes Milliseconds Beats Here’s how to assign a mark at the desired location in a
song.

1. Verify that the transport is stopped and the

1. Locate the point where you want to assign
main screen is shown.
a mark.
The locate function can only be used when the transport
A mark can be assigned either during playback or when
is stopped.
the transport is stopped.

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the

2. Press the [MARK/CLEAR] key in the control
flashing part to the unit to change.
section.
The unit that can be changed is indicated by the flashing
A mark is assigned to the current location. The mark
value.
number appears in the MARKER field at the bottom right
of the display.
When the current position matches the mark, a marker
0 13 240 6- 2- 8 icon appears to the right of the mark number.
GH
GH
3. Turn the dial to change the value. 006- 2- 8

When you change the displayed value, the recorder 01 Marker icon
immediately moves to the new location. Pressing the
PLAY [R] key starts playback from that point. Mark number

Mark numbers (01 – 99) are assigned automatically in

HINT
• While the transport is stopped, the REW [T] / FF [Y] keys
ascending order from the beginning of the song. If you
can be used to move backward or forward in 1-second steps. add a new mark between two existing marks, the
• If you have set marks using the marker function, you can use subsequent marks will be renumbered.
the locate function to move among marks. For details, see the
next section. Add a mark
Mark 00 01 02 03 04
number
Song

Mark 00 01 02 03 04 05
number
Song

HINT
Mark number 00 is already set at the beginning of the song
(the counter zero location).

ZOOM MRS-8 35
MRS-8(E).book 36 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

2. Press the [MARK/CLEAR] key in the control

Locating a mark section.
This section explains how to select a mark and move to The selected mark will be deleted, and subsequent marks
its position. This can be done in two ways: you can use will be renumbered.
dedicated keys to jump to marks in the vicinity, or you
can specify the mark number directly.
HINT
• It is not possible to delete the mark (number 00) located at the
■ Locating the next or previous mark beginning of the song.
• A deleted mark cannot be recovered.
1. From the main screen, press either the
MARKER [U] or [I] key in the control
section.
Playing back the same
Each time you press the key, the unit jumps to the next
mark before or after the current location.
passage repeatedly (A-B
repeat function)
Mark Current location
A-B repeat is a function that automatically plays only a
Song
specified section of a song. This is useful to listen to the
same passage repeatedly.

1. Move to the point where repeat playback

should start, and press the [A-B REPEAT]
■ Specifying the mark number to locate key in the control section.
The key flashes, and the repeat start location (point A) is
1. From the main screen, use the cursor left/ set.
right keys to cause the mark number to
flash.
In this condition, the mark number can be changed.
HINT
H The A/B point can be specified either during playback or
H when the MRS-8 is stopped.
006- 2- 8
2. Move to the point where repeat playback
01
should end, and press the [A-B REPEAT]
Mark number flashes key once more.
The [A-B REPEAT] key changes from flashing to
constantly lit, and the repeat end location (point B) is set.
2. Turn the dial to select the desired mark
number.
As soon as the number is changed, the recorder jumps to NOTE
that number. If you specify a point B that is located earlier than point A, the
region from points B → A will be played repeatedly.

Deleting a mark 3. To redo the A/B point setting, press the [A-
B REPEAT] key so that it goes out, and then
Here’s how to delete a mark that you assigned. repeat the procedure from step 1.

1. Locate the mark to delete. 4. To begin repeat playback, press the PLAY
The mark whose number is shown in the MARKER field [R] key.
can be deleted. A mark can only be deleted when it When point B is reached, the recorder jumps to point A,
exactly matches the current location. Make sure that the and playback resumes.
mark icon is shown. If not, use the MARKER [U] / [I]
keys to jump to the exact marker point.

36 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 37 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

5. To stop repeat playback, press the STOP 6. When you come to the intended punch-out
[P] key. point, press the REC [O] key once more.
The REC [O] key goes out, and the MRS-8 switches
6. To turn off repeat playback, press the [A-B from recording to playback.
REPEAT] key.
The key goes out, and repeat playback is turned off. The 7. To stop the recorder, press the STOP [P]
A/B point locations will be erased. key.

8. To check the newly recorded content,

locate to a point before the punch-in point,
Re-recording only a and press the PLAY [R] key.
specified region (punch-in/
out function)
Auto punch-in/out
Punch-in/out is a function that lets you re-record just a Auto punch-in/out is a function that lets you specify
specified region of a previously recorded track. The beforehand the region to be re-recorded. This is
action of switching a currently-playing track to record convenient when you cannot operate the MRS-8 because
mode is called “punch-in”, and the action of switching you are playing the instrument yourself, or when very fast
back from recording to playback is called “punch-out”. playback/record switching is required.
The MRS-8 provides two ways to do this. You can use the
panel keys to punch-in/out manually (“manual punch-in/ In point Out point
out”), or you can cause punch-in/out to occur
automatically at previously specified points (“auto Track Playback Recording Playback
punch-in/out”).
In order to perform auto punch-in/out, you must first
specify the In point (the point where the recorder
Manual punch-in/out switches from playback to record) and Out point (the
point where the recorder switches from record to
To re-record a part of a track using the panel keys,
playback), and then perform the recording operation.
proceed as follows.

1. Raise the fader of the track on which to

1. Raise the fader of the track on which to
perform punch-in/out to a suitable position.
perform punch-in/out to a suitable position.

2. Press the status key of that track

2. Play your instrument connected to the
INPUT jack and adjust the input sensitivity
repeatedly, until the key is lit in red.
and recording level as required.
For information on how to adjust input sensitivity and
3. Play your instrument connected to the
recording level, see page 15.
INPUT jack and adjust the input sensitivity
and recording level as required.
3. Locate the point where punch-in should
For information on how to adjust input sensitivity and
occur, and press the [AUTO PUNCH I/O]
recording level, see page 15.
key.
The key flashes. This sets the “In point” at which
4. Locate a point shortly before the intended
recording will begin.
punch-in point, and press the PLAY [R] key
to begin playback.
4. Locate the point where punch-out should
occur, and press the [AUTO PUNCH I/O]
5. When you come to the punch-in point,
key once more.
press the REC [O] key.
The key changes from flashing to solidly lit. This sets the
The REC [O] key lights up, and the MRS-8 switches
“Out point” at which recording will end.
from playback to recording.
While the key is lit, auto punch-in/out is active.

ZOOM MRS-8 37
MRS-8(E).book 38 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

5. Repeatedly press the status key for the

track on which to perform punch-in/out, Recording several tracks
until the key is lit in red.
on a master track (mixdown
6. Use the Locate function to go to a spot
function)
before the In point.
If the current location is outside the region between the In This section explains how to play recorded audio tracks
and Out points, the status key flashes in red. When the as well as drum/bass track sounds and record them as a
current location is between the In point and Out points, stereo mix on a master track (mixdown).
the status key is lit in red. In this case, use the locate
function once again to go to a point that is earlier than the
In point. About the master track

7. To rehearse the auto punch-in/out process, The master track is a set of stereo tracks that is separate
press the PLAY [R] key. from the normal audio tracks. The most common use of
The MRS-8 will begin playing. When you reach the In the master track is as a track on which the end result of a
point, the track on which you are punching in/out will be mixdown process is recorded.
muted. When you reach the Out point, muting is defeated. The MRS-8 offers one master track for each project.
(You are always able to monitor the input signal during Similar to the regular audio tracks, the master track also
this time.) Performing this action does not delete or has ten virtual tracks (V-takes). This allows you to record
record anything on the track. different mixes on several V-takes and select the optimum
To change the positions of the In point or Out point, press take later.
the [AUTO PUNCH I/O] key so that the key goes out, and When you switch the master track to the recording
then repeat steps 3 – 4. condition, the signal after passing the [MASTER] fader
When you are finished rehearsing, move again to a (the same signal as available from the MASTER
location earlier than the In point. OUTPUT jacks) is recorded on the master track.

8. To actually perform auto punch-in/out, hold

down the REC [O] key and press the PLAY
[R] key. Master
The MRS-8 will begin playing. When you reach the In track
point, recording begins automatically (punch-in). When
you reach the Out point, recording ends automatically
and playback resumes (punch-out).

9. When you are finished recording, press the

STOP [P] key.

10. To listen to the recorded result, repeatedly

press the status key for the track on which
you recorded, until the key is lit green. Then
HINT
move to a location earlier than the In point,
It is possible to play the master tracks of several projects in
and press the PLAY [R] key. succession (→ p. 111).
To re-do the punch-in/punch-out recording, repeat steps 5
– 9.

11. When you are satisfied with the recording,

press the [AUTO PUNCH I/O] key so that
the key goes out.
The auto punch-in/out function is canceled, and the In
point and Out point settings are discarded.

38 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 39 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

Recording on the master track starts.

Master track mixdown steps
Here’s how to mix audio tracks and the drum/bass track 7. When recording is complete, press the
sound onto two stereo channels and record these on the STOP [P] key.
master track.

1. Press the [TRACK PARAMETER] key in the

Playing the master track
display section and use the cursor up/down
To play the recorded master track, proceed as follows.
keys to bring up the indication “TR x-yy” on
the display (where x is the track number
1. From the main screen, press the [MASTER]
and yy is the V-take number).
status key repeatedly until the key is lit in
green.
The master track is now ready for playback. In this mode,
TR 4- 1
GTR 4- 1 all other status keys are out and the audio tracks and
drum/bass track are muted. The insert and send/return
effects are also switched off.
2. Use the [MASTER] status key or the cursor
left/right keys to select the master track.
The name of the V-take selected for the master track is
shown. (If there is noting recorded on the V-take, the
indication “NO DATA” is shown.)

TR M- 1
NO DATA
3. Use the dial to select the V-take.
When you have selected the V-take, press the [EXIT] key
to return to the main screen. Master
track
4. From the main screen, press the [MASTER]
status key so that the key is lit in red. 2. Press the ZERO [U] key to return to the
The master track is now ready for recording. The signal beginning of the song, and then press the
after passing the [MASTER] fader will be sent to the PLAY [R] key.
master track. Playback of the master track starts. To adjust the playback
The other tracks operate normally, also while the volume, use the [MASTER] fader.
[MASTER] status key is lit in red.
3. To stop recorder playback, press the STOP
5. Press the PLAY [R] key to start playback [P] key.
and adjust the mixing balance.
The individual track level settings as well as panning, 4. To cancel the master track playback mode,
insert effect, and send/return effect settings all have an press the [MASTER] status key so that the
influence on the signal that is sent to the master track. key goes out.
Adjust levels while watching the L/R level meter, and Muting for the audio tracks and drum/bass track is
make sure that no signal clipping occurs. canceled, and the unit returns to the previous condition.

6. To carry out the mixdown operation, press

the ZERO [U] key to return to the
beginning of the song, and then press the
PLAY [R] key while holding down the REC
[O] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 39
MRS-8(E).book 40 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up

Combining multiple tracks the indication “BOUNCE RECTRACK” on
the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
on one or two tracks
The current setting is shown.
(bounce function)

“Bounce” is a function that mixes the sound from the

RECTRACK
audio tracks and drum/bass track, and records them on a
MUTE
mono or stereo audio track. (This is sometimes called
“ping-pong recording”.) The indications have the following meaning.
You might bounce the contents of tracks 1 – 6 onto tracks
7/8 and then switch the V-takes of tracks 1 – 6 to record • MUTE:
new versions of your performance. The recording track(s) will be muted (default setting).
If necessary, you can play back all tracks 1 – 8, and
bounce the signal onto an empty V-take of a selected • PLAY:
track. The recording track(s) will play back.

4. To play the bounce destination track, turn

HINT the dial to change the setting to “PLAY”.
• You can mix the signals from the [INPUT] jacks into the
bounce recording.
• You can bounce the drum/bass track only, while playing back
5. To return to the main screen, press the
all other tracks (→ p. 42). This lets you record a drum fill-in by [EXIT] key repeatedly.
hitting the pads while listening to the audio tracks.
■ Selecting the recording destination
V-take
Making bounce settings
By default, the result of the bounce operation will be
Before using the bounce function, make the required recorded on the V-take that is currently selected for the
settings as follows. recording track(s). To play back a track while bouncing
onto another V-take of that track, you can use the
■ Selecting operation status of bounce following procedure to change the recording destination
V-take.
destination track(s)
By default, the bounce destination recording track(s) will 1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
be automatically muted. This is to prevent the content of UTILITY] key.
the track being mixed to the bounced signal. The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the
To play back the V-take of a track while you bounce- display.
record onto another V-take of that track, use the following
procedure to change the internal setting so that the 2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
recording track(s) will also play back. the indication “SYSTEM BOUNCE” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
UTILITY] key.
3. Verify that the indication “BOUNCE REC
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the TAKE” is shown on the display, and press
display. the [ENTER] key.
The V-take currently selected as bounce destination is
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
shown.
the indication “SYSTEM BOUNCE” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.

40 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 41 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

bounced result, set the Pan parameter for the odd-numbered

and even-numbered tracks to separate left and right settings.
REC TAKE
CURRENT 4. Press the [BOUNCE] key.
The key lights up and the bounce function for the
The following settings are available. destination tracks is turned on. While the key is lit, the
track(s)/V-take(s) selected in steps 2 and 3 are used as
• CURRENT (default) recording destination. Other tracks and effects are
The bounce result will be recorded on the V-take unchanged.
currently selected for the recording track.
5. Play the song from the beginning and
• 1 – 10 adjust the mixing balance of the various
Regardless of the V-take currently selected for the track, tracks.
the bounce result will be recorded on the specified V-take. The individual track level and panning settings as well as
the insert effect and send/return effect settings all have an
4. Turn the dial to specify the recording influence on the mixed signal that is sent to the bounce
destination V-take. destination tracks. Adjust levels while watching the L/R
level meter, and make sure that no signal clipping occurs.
5. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly. 6. Press the ZERO [U] key to return to the
counter zero position, and press the PLAY
[R] key while holding down the REC [O]
HINT key.
By setting the operation for the bounce destination track(s)
Bounce recording starts.
to “PLAY” and selecting an unused V-take as recording
destination, you can play all tracks and bounce the result as
an entire song onto the V-take.
7. When recording is complete, press the
STOP [P] key.

Executing bounce recording HINT

It is also possible to combine the bounce function and the
This example explains how to bounce the contents of all
auto punch-in/out function (→ p. 37).
tracks onto V-take 10 of tracks 7/8.

1. Refer to “Making bounce settings” and set

the BOUNCE RECTRACK parameter to
“PLAY”.

2. Refer to “Making bounce settings” and set

the BOUNCE REC TAKE parameter to “10”.

3. Press the status key of tracks 7/8

repeatedly, until the key is lit in red.
In this condition, V-takes 10 of tracks 7/8 are selected as
bounce destination.

HINT
• When a single mono audio track is selected as bounce
destination, the bounce signal is mixed to mono for recording.
• When a pair of mono tracks with odd/even numbers is
selected as bounce destination, the bounce signal is recorded
in stereo. To achieve correct left/right positioning of the

ZOOM MRS-8 41
MRS-8(E).book 42 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

• BASS TR
Recording drum/bass Bass track
sound on audio tracks
4. Turn the dial to select “DRUM TR” or “BASS
(rhythm recording) TR” as recording source.

The MRS-8 allows you to bounce only the drum track or 5. Press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to return to
bass track onto any track, while playing all tracks. This the main screen.
function is called “rhythm recording”.
This lets you record a drum fill-in by hitting the pads
while listening to the audio tracks.
Rhythm recording procedure
While playing the audio tracks, you can now record the
Selecting the recording drum/bass track on any audio track.
source
1. From the main screen, press the [BOUNCE]
In the default condition of a project, the signal key.
immediately after the [MASTER] fader is selected as The key lights up, and bounce recording is active.
recording source for bouncing. To record the drum/bass
track, you must switch the recording source to the drum 2. Repeatedly press the status key for the
track or bass track. track on which to record, until the key is lit
in red.
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/ In this condition, the signal of the track selected in step 4
UTILITY] key in the display section. of “Selecting the recording source” will be recorded.

HINT
SYSTEM To record the drum track in stereo, select a pair of stereo
PROJECT tracks (or two mono tracks) as recording destination. If only
one mono track is selected, the left/right signals will be
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up mixed to mono.
the indication “SYSTEM BOUNCE” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key. 3. Press the [SONG/PATTERN] key in the
rhythm section, and turn the dial to select
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up the rhythm pattern/rhythm song.
the indication “BOUNCE REC SRC” on the To record your pad play, select an empty rhythm pattern/
display, and press the [ENTER] key. rhythm song. Check that the sounds to play are assigned
The currently selected bounce recording source is shown. to the pads.

4. Press the PLAY [R] key and adjust the

REC SRC drum/bass track output level.
MASTER Adjust levels while watching the level meter, and make
sure that no signal clipping occurs.
The following settings are available.
5. Press the ZERO [U] key to return to the
• MASTER counter zero position, and start recording.
Signal immediately after [MASTER] fader The rhythm pattern/rhythm song play is recorded on the
audio track. If you hit the pads during recording, this
• DRUM TR sound will also be captured.
Drum track

42 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 43 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Recorder]

6. When play is complete, press the STOP [P]

key.

7. Press the [BOUNCE] key.

The key goes out, and bounce recording is canceled. To
return to the normal condition, switch the recording
source back to “MASTER”, as described in “Selecting
the recording source”.
COUNT
4
Number of pre-count beats

When the setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to

Making settings for pre- return to the screen of step 2.
count operation
4. To change the volume of the pre-count
sound, use the cursor left/right keys to
In the default condition of a project, a pre-count of four
bring up the indication “PreCount
beats is heard before the start of recording. The number
VOLUME” on the display, and press the
of beats and the pre-count volume can be changed as
[ENTER] key.
follows.
The display changes as follows. Turn the dial to set the
volume (0 – 15).
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
UTILITY] key in the display section.
VOLUME
10
SYSTEM Pre-count volume
PROJECT
5. When the setting is complete, press the
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
[EXIT] key repeatedly to return to the main
the indication “SYSTEM PreCount” on the
screen.
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
When you initiate a recording, the selected number of
The display changes as follows.
pre-count beats will be heard at the selected volume.

PreCount
COUNT
3. To change the number of pre-count beats,
press the [ENTER] key.
The current setting is shown. Turn the dial to make the
selection from the following choices.

• OFF
The pre-count is turned off.

• 1–8
A pre-count of 1 – 8 beats is heard.

• SPECIAL
A special pre-count as follows is heard.

ZOOM MRS-8 43
all.fm 44 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後６時４９分

Reference [Track Editing]

This section explains how to edit audio data contained on tracks 1 – 8 of the recorder section. There are two major types
of editing functions: specifying a range within a track for editing, or editing an entire V-take.

• Trim
Editing a range of data Retain only a specified range of audio data and erase the
rest.
• Fade I/O (Fade-in/out)
The procedure for specifying a range within a track and
Perform fade-in/fade-out over a specified audio data
then performing an editing action is explained below.
interval.
• Reverse
Basic steps for range editing Reverse a specified range of audio data.

When performing editing for a specified range of data, 5. Press the [ENTER] key.
some steps are similar for each action. These are as
The screen for selecting the track and V-take for editing
follows.
appears. The display shown below is an example for
selecting the Copy command in step 4.
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
UTILITY] key in the display section.
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the Copy Src
display. TR 1- 1

SYSTEM 6. Use the dial or the status keys to select the

PROJECT track (1 – 8, MASTER), and use the cursor
up/down keys to select the V-take number
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up (1 – 10).
the indication “SYSTEM TR EDIT” on the
display.
Copy Src
TR 3- 1
SYSTEM
TR EDIT A V-take that is not currently selected for the track can
also be selected for editing. When track 8 is selected,
3. Press the [ENTER] key. turning the dial clockwise lets you select odd/even track
The track edit menu for operating on a range of data pairs (track 1/2, track 7/8 etc.) or the master track.
appears.

Copy Src
TR EDIT TR1/2
Copy
4. Use the cursor left/right keys to select one NOTE
of the following editing commands. • You can press the status keys for two adjacent odd/even-
numbered mono tracks together to select these tracks.
• Copy • Repeatedly pressing the status keys for stereo tracks selects
Copy a specified range of audio data. the odd-numbered track, even-numbered track, and stereo
track in sequence.
• Move • When two tracks or the master track have been selected as
Move a specified range of audio data. editing source, the editing destination must also be two tracks
• Erase or the master track. The currently selected V-take for each
Erase a specified range of audio data. track will be the destination.

44 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 45 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the

7. Press the [ENTER] key. flashing section of the counter, and turn the
The subsequent steps will differ, depending on which dial to specify the copy start point.
command was selected in step 4. See the sections for the The point can be specified in minutes/seconds/
respective commands. milliseconds, or in measures/beats/ticks. You can also use
the MARKER [U] / [I] keys to jump to a mark (→ p.
8. When the editing command has been 36) and use this as starting point.
carried out, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly
to return to the main screen.
HINT
If you specify a point where no audio data exist, the second
NOTE line of the display shows *.
After executing an edit command for rewriting audio data,
the original data cannot be restored. To retain the condition 3. Press the [ENTER] key.
before editing, use the capture and swap function (→ p. 53). The display changes to “Copy Src END”. This screen lets
you specify the copy range end point.

Copying a specified range of

data Copy Src
END
You can copy the audio data of a specified range to a 3 15 0 75- 4- 0

specified position on a specified track/V-take. This action 00

will overwrite the existing data at the destination

location. The copy source data will be unchanged.

HINT
Copy source track The specified range is memorized until another entry is
made. This lets you keep using the setting for editing the
same range on a number of tracks.
Copy
4. Specify the copy end point in the same way
Copy destination track as described in step 2.
If you press the PLAY [R] key at this point, the specified
range will be played.
1. Refer to steps 1 – 6 of “Basic steps for
range editing” to select the copy source
track/V-take, and press the [ENTER] key.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The display now shows “Copy Dst TR x-yy” (where x is
The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
the track number and yy the V-take number). From this
specify the copy start point.
screen, you can specify the copy destination track/V-take.

Copy Src Copy Dst

START TR 1- 1
0 0 0 1- 1- 0

00

HINT
The copy range start point is shown on the counter in You can select the same track as copy source and copy
minutes, seconds, milliseconds, and in measures, beats, destination, and the copy destination range may overlap the
copy source range.
and ticks.

6. Select the copy destination track/V-take in

the same way as for the copy source, and
press the [ENTER] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 45
MRS-8(E).book 46 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

The display changes as follows. From this screen, you 2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
can specify the copy destination start point. flashing section of the counter, and turn the
dial to specify the move start point.
The point can be specified in minutes/seconds/
Copy Dst milliseconds, or in measures/beats/ticks.
TO
3 15 0 75- 4- 0

00 HINT
If you specify a point where no audio data exist, the second
line of the display shows *.

7. Specify the copy destination start point in

the same way as in step 2, and press the
3. Press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes to “Move Src END”. This screen lets
[ENTER] key.
you specify the move range end point.
The indication “Copy SURE?” appears on the display.

8. To carry out the copy operation, press the Move Src

[ENTER] key. END
When the copy operation is completed, the unit returns to 4 28 0 103- 3-44
the track edit menu. 00

By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,

you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
time. 4. Specify the move end point in the same way
as described in step 2.
If you press the PLAY [R] key at this point, the specified
Moving a specified range of range will be played.
data
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
You can move the audio data of a specified range to a The display now shows “Move Dst TR x-yy” (where x is
specified position on a specified track/V-take. This action the track number and yy the V-take number). From this
will overwrite the existing data at the destination screen, you can specify the move destination track/V-
location. The move source data will be erased. take.

Move source track

Move Dst
TR 1- 1
Move

HINT
Move destination track You can select the same track as move source and move
destination.

1. Refer to steps 1 – 6 of “Basic steps for

range editing” to select the move source
6. Select the move destination track/V-take in
the same way as for the move source, and
track/V-take, and press the [ENTER] key.
press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
The display changes as follows. From this screen, you
specify the move start point.
can specify the move destination start point.

Move Src Move Dst

START TO
0 0 0 1- 1- 0
4 28 0 103- 3-44
00
00

46 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 47 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

7. Specify the move destination start point in

the same way as for the move source, and
press the [ENTER] key.
Ers Src
END
The indication “Move SURE?” appears on the display. 1 44 0 40- 4-23

00
8. To carry out the move operation, press the
[ENTER] key once more.
When the move operation is completed, the unit returns 4. Specify the erase end point in the same way
to the track edit menu. as described in step 2.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, If you press the PLAY [R] key at this point, the specified
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a range will be played.
time.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The indication “Erase SURE?” appears on the display.
Erasing a specified range of
data 6. To carry out the erase operation, press the
[ENTER] key.
You can erase the audio data of a specified range and When the erase operation is completed, the unit returns to
return the range to the mute (non-recorded) condition. the track edit menu.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
Erase you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time.

Trimming a specified range of

1. Refer to steps 1 – 6 of “Basic steps for data
range editing” to select the track/V-take for
erasing, and press the [ENTER] key. You can erase the audio data outside of a specified range
The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can and adjust the data start/end point (trimming). This is
specify the erase start point. useful to eliminate unnecessary portions from a
completed master track.

Ers Src Trim Trim

START
0 0 0 1- 1- 0

00

NOTE
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the When data before a specified section are erased (trimmed),
flashing section of the counter, and turn the the remaining audio data will move up by that amount.
dial to specify the erase start point. Therefore the timing may become mismatched with regard to
other tracks.
The point can be specified in minutes/seconds/
milliseconds, or in measures/beats/ticks.
1. Refer to “Basic steps for range editing” to
select the track/V-take from which to trim
HINT data, and press the [ENTER] key.
If you specify a point where no audio data exist, the second The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
line of the display shows *.
specify the start point of the range that you want to keep.

3. Press the [ENTER] key.

The display changes to “Ers Src END”. This screen lets Trim Src
you specify the erase range end point. START
0 0 0 1- 1- 0

00

ZOOM MRS-8 47
MRS-8(E).book 48 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
flashing section of the counter, and turn the specify the fade-in/out start point.
dial to specify the start point.
The point can be specified in minutes/seconds/
milliseconds, or in measures/beats/ticks. Fade Src
START
0 0 0 1- 1- 0

HINT 00

If you specify a point where no audio data exist, the second

line of the display shows *.
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
3. Press the [ENTER] key. flashing section of the counter, and turn the
The display changes to “Trim Src END”. This screen lets dial to specify the fade-in/out start point.
you specify the end point of the range that you want to The point can be specified in minutes/seconds/
keep. milliseconds, or in measures/beats/ticks.

Trim Src HINT

END If you specify a point where no audio data exist, the second
4 10 0 96- 4-16 line of the display shows *.
00

3. Press the [ENTER] key.

The display changes to “Fade Src END”. This screen lets
4. Specify the end point in the same way as
you specify the fade-in/out end point.
described in step 2.
If you press the PLAY [R] key at this point, the specified
range will be played. Fade Src
END
5. Press the [ENTER] key. 0 10 0 4- 4-17

The indication “Trim SURE?” appears on the display. 00

6. To carry out the trimming operation, press

the [ENTER] key. 4. Specify the fade-in/out end point in the
same way as described in step 2.
When the trimming operation is completed, the unit
returns to the track edit menu. If you press the PLAY [R] key at this point, the specified
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, range will be played.
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
time. 5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows.

Fade-in/fade-out of specified
data range Fade Src
CURVE 1-1

You can fade in or fade out the audio data over a specified Volume change curve
range.
6. Turn the dial to select the fade-in or fade-
Fade-in out curve.
Curves I-1 to I-3 are for fade-in, and curves o-1 to o-3 are
for fade-out. The different kinds of curves look as
follows.
1. Refer to steps 1 – 6 of “Basic steps for
range editing” to select the track for fade-
in or fade-out, and press the [ENTER] key.

48 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 49 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the

flashing section of the counter, and turn the
Fade-in dial to specify the reverse start point.
I-1 I-2 I-3
The point can be specified in minutes/seconds/
milliseconds, or in measures/beats/ticks.

HINT
If you specify a point where no audio data exist, the second
Fade-out line of the display shows *.
o-1 o-2 o-3

3. Press the [ENTER] key.

The display changes to “Rvrs Src END”. This screen lets
you specify the reverse end point.

7. Press the [ENTER] key.

Rvrs Src
END
The indication “Fade SURE?” appears on the display. 1 18 0 42- 2- 0

00
8. To carry out the fade-in/fade-out operation,
press the [ENTER] key once more.
When the fade-in/fade-out operation is completed, the 4. Specify the reverse end point in the same
unit returns to the track edit menu. way as described in step 2.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, If you press the PLAY [R] key at this point, the specified
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a range will be played.
time.
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
The indication “Reverse SURE?” appears on the display.
Reversing a specified range of
audio data 6. To carry out the reversing operation, press
the [ENTER] key.
You can reverse the order of a specified range of audio
When the reverse operation is completed, the unit returns
data.
to the track edit menu.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
Reverse you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
A B C D E E D C B A time.

1. Refer to steps 1 – 6 of “Basic steps for

range editing” to select the track/V-take for
reversing, and press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
specify the reverse start point.

Rvrs Src
START
0 0 0 1- 1- 0

00

ZOOM MRS-8 49
MRS-8(E).book 50 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

Editing using V-takes

ERASE
TR 1- 2
Recorded audio data can also be edited in V-take units.
This is convenient to exchange the data on two V-takes or 5. Repeatedly press the [FUNCTION] key to
delete a V-take that is no longer needed. The procedure is call up the command to use. The following
explained in this section. editing commands are available.

Basic steps for V-take editing • Erase

Erase the audio data on a specified V-take.
When editing audio data in V-take units, some steps are
similar for each action. These are as follows. • Copy
Copy the audio data of a specified V-take to another V-
1. From the main screen, press the [TRACK take.
PARAMETER] key in the display section.
• Move
2. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up Move the audio data of a specified V-take to another V-
the following indication on the display. take.

• Exchg (Exchange)
Exchange the audio data of a specified V-take with the
Track number V-take number
data of another V-take.
TR 1- 1
V-take name GTR 1- 1 • Import
Import any V-take from another project saved on SD card.
This screen lets you select the V-take. While the screen is
shown, the V-take for the audio tracks (1 – 8, master HINT
track) can be switched. You can still change your track and V-take selection while
selecting an editing command.

HINT
If you select a V-take on which nothing is recorded, the
6. Press the [ENTER] key.
indication “NO DATA” is shown. The subsequent steps will differ, depending on which
command was selected in step 5. See the sections for the
3. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status respective commands.
keys and the dial to select the track and V-
take. 7. When the editing command has been
The status key for the currently selected track is lit in carried out, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly
orange. It is also possible to select the master track. In this to return to the main screen.
case, the track number indication shows “M”.
NOTE
After executing an edit command for rewriting audio data,
HINT
the original data cannot be restored. To retain the condition
Pressing the status key for a stereo track repeatedly selects
before editing, use the capture and swap function (→ p. 53).
the odd-numbered track and even-numbered track in
sequence.

4. Press the [FUNCTION] key in the control

section.
Commands for editing audio data in V-take units appear
on the display.

50 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 51 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

Erasing a V-take HINT

If nothing is recorded on the V-take selected as editing
You can erase the audio data on a specified V-take. The V- destination, the indication “E” is shown next to the V-take
take is returned to the non-recorded condition. number.

Erase 2. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status

keys and the dial to select the destination
track/V-take, and press the [ENTER] key.
1. Refer to steps 1 – 5 of “Basic steps for V- If no audio data exist at the copy destination, the
take editing” to select the track/V-take to indication “COPY SURE?” appears on the display. If
erase and to bring up the indication audio data exist, the indication “OverWrt?” is shown.
“ERASE” on the display. Then press the When the copy operation is performed, these data will be
[ENTER] key. overwritten.
The indication “ERASE SURE?” appears on the display.
3. To carry out the copy operation, press the
[ENTER] key once more.
2. To carry out the erase operation, press the
[ENTER] key once more. When the copy operation is completed, the unit returns to
the V-take selection menu.
The V-take name changes to “NO DATA” and the V-take
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
reverts to the non-recorded condition. When the erase
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
operation is completed, the V-take selection screen
time.
appears again.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a Moving a V-take
time.
You can move the audio data of a specified V-take to any
other track/V-take. This action will overwrite any existing
Copying a V-take data on the destination V-take. The data on the move
source V-take will be erased.
You can copy the audio data of a specified V-take to any
other V-take. This action will overwrite any existing data
on the destination V-take. The data on the copy source V- Move source track
take will be unchanged.

Move
Copy source track

Move destination track

Copy
1. Refer to steps 1 – 5 of “Basic steps for V-
take editing” to select the track/V-take to
Copy destination track move and to bring up the indication
“MOVE” on the display. Then press the
1. Refer to steps 1 – 5 of “Basic steps for V- [ENTER] key.
take editing” to select the track/V-take to The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
copy and to bring up the indication “COPY” specify the move destination track/V-take.
on the display. Then press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
specify the copy destination track/V-take. MOVE TO
TR 1- 2E
COPY TO
TR 1- 2E HINT
If nothing is recorded on the V-take selected as editing

ZOOM MRS-8 51
MRS-8(E).book 52 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

destination, the indication “E” is shown next to the V-take 3. To carry out the exchange operation, press
number. the [ENTER] key once more.
When the exchange operation is completed, the unit
2. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status returns to the V-take selection menu.
keys and the dial to select the destination By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
track/V-take, and press the [ENTER] key. you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
If no audio data exist at the move destination, the time.
indication “MOVE SURE?” appears on the display. If
audio data exist, the indication “OverWrt?” is shown.
When the move operation is performed, these data will be Importing a V-take from
overwritten. another project
3. To carry out the move operation, press the You can import any V-take from another project into a
[ENTER] key once more. specified track/V-take of the current project. Any audio
When the move operation is completed, the unit returns data on the destination V-take are overwritten by the
to the V-take selection menu. imported V-take.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a Track of import source project
time.

Import
Exchanging V-takes
You can exchange the audio data of two specified V-takes. Import destination track

NOTE
Exchange The master track cannot be specified as import destination
or import source.

1. Refer to steps 1 – 5 of “Basic steps for V-

take editing” to select the import
NOTE
You cannot exchange V-takes of the master track. destination track/V-take and to bring up the
indication “IMPORT” on the display. Then
1. Refer to steps 1 – 5 of “Basic steps for V- press the [ENTER] key.
take editing” to select the track/V-take to The name of the import source project is shown on the
exchange and to bring up the indication display.
“EXCHG” on the display. Then press the
[ENTER] key.
You can now select the other track/V-take.
IMPORT
PRJ002 2

Project number
Import source project name
EXCHG TO
TR 1- 3
2. Turn the dial to select the import source
2. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status project, and press the [ENTER] key.
keys and the dial to select the exchange The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
destination track/V-take, and press the specify the import source track/V-take.
[ENTER] key.
The indication “EXCHG SURE?” appears on the display.

52 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 53 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

Track/V-take number Track capture and swap

TR 6- 1 You can capture the audio data of any track and
T06-LdVo 2
temporarily store them. Later you can swap the captured
V-take name
data with the current data of the track. This lets you save
the state of a track before an editing operation. If the
3. Use the cursor left/right keys and the dial to result of the operation is not as desired, you can then
select the track/V-take to import, and press easily restore the track to its previous state.
the [ENTER] key.
When an unrecorded track/V-take is selected, the Recorded data
Capture
indication “NO DATA” is shown instead of the V-take
Recorder
name. Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
4. Press the [ENTER] key.
The indication “IMPORT SURE?” appears on the
Captured
display. If audio data exist at the import destination, the data of
indication “OverWrt?” is shown. When the import track 1 Capture operation for track 1
operation is performed, these data will be overwritten.
Swap Rerecorded data
5. To carry out the import operation, press the Recorder
[ENTER] key once more. Track 1
Track 2
When the import operation is completed, the unit returns Track 3
to the V-take selection menu.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, Captured
data of
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a track 1 Swap operation for track 1
time.

Recorder
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3

Captured
data of
track 1

Capture/swap is performed on a track basis. If required,

you can capture all audio tracks.
Captured audio data will be retained on the SD card until
another project is loaded or the power is turned off.

Capturing a track
You can capture the audio data of any specified track.

1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/

UTILITY] key in the display section.
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the
display.

ZOOM MRS-8 53
MRS-8(E).book 54 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Track Editing]

Swapping track data

SYSTEM You can swap the current data of a track with the captured
PROJECT data.

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up 1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
the indication “SYSTEM CAP/SWAP” on the UTILITY] key in the display section.
display, and press the [ENTER] key. The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the
The display changes as follows. display.

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up

CAPTURE the indication “SYSTEM CAP/SWAP” on the
TR1 display, and press the [ENTER] key.

3. Use the status keys or the dial to select a 3. Use the status keys or the dial to select a
track for capture. track that was previously captured.
The status key for the currently selected track is lit in When you select a captured track, the indication “SWAP”
orange. It is also possible to select the master track. In this appears on the display.
case, the indication shows “MASTER” and the
[MASTER] status key is lit.
SWAP
TR1
HINT
• Tracks for which stereo link is active, stereo tracks, and the
master track can only be captured in stereo. HINT
• A track for which an unrecorded V-take is selected cannot be If you select a track that was not captured, the indication
captured. “CAPTURE” appears.

4. Press the [ENTER] key.

NOTE
The indication “CAPTURE SURE?” appears on the Captured audio data can only be swapped with the original
display. track.

5. To carry out the capture operation, press 4. Press the [ENTER] key.
the [ENTER] key once more. The indication “SWAP SURE?” appears on the display.
When capture is completed, the indication “SWAP TR x”
(where x is the track number) appears on the display. This 5. To carry out the swap operation, press the
indicates that the track has been captured and can be [ENTER] key once more.
swapped if necessary. When the operation is completed, the audio data of the
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, selected track will have been replaced by the previously
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a captured audio data.
time. By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
6. To return to the main screen, press the time.
[EXIT] key repeatedly.

HINT
By performing the swap operation once more, you can return
the track contents to the previous condition.

6. To return to the main screen, press the

[EXIT] key repeatedly.

54 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 55 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Mixer]
This section explains the functions and operation of the mixer built into the MRS-8.

Similarly, mute on/off for the audio tracks is switched

About the mixer using the status keys (1 – 4, 5/6, 7/8), and mute on/off for
the drum/bass track is switched using the [RHYTHM]
status key.
The MRS-8 incorporates a mixer that processes the audio The [MASTER] status key switches the master track
track output signals as well as the drum kit/bass program between recording and playback.
output signals (the drum track/bass track) into a stereo
mix that is supplied to the MASTER OUTPUT jacks.
Control of drum track/bass track
The mixer adjusts parameters such as level, panning, EQ, Control of tracks 1 - 8
and send/return effect intensity for each track.
Control of stereo mix or master
track
The level for the audio tracks is adjusted with the
corresponding faders in the fader section.
The [MASTER] fader adjusts the stereo mix/master track
volume.
The level of the drum track and bass track is adjusted with
the [RHYTHM] fader after selecting either drum track or
bass track with the [DRUM/BASS] key.

Recording Recorder
standby tracks
Track 1
MASTER OUTPUT
INPUT Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
No recording Tracks 5/6
standby track
Tracks 7/8
From
immediately To immediately
after Master Track before
[MASTER] [MASTER] fader
fader
Rhythm section
To
Drum kits master
track
Bass program

DRUM BASS 1 2 3 4 5/6 7/8 MASTER

Send/return effect

Mixer
From master track

ZOOM MRS-8 55
MRS-8(E).book 56 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Mixer]

If no recording track is selected, the signal from the 2. Select the input source as follows.
inputs can be sent to the mixer and mixed to the output The input source selection is made using the INPUT
signal during bounce and mixdown. In this case, track [ON/OFF] 1/2 keys and the [MIC] key. Repeatedly
parameters such as panning and send/return effect depth pressing a key toggles between the lit/out (or flashing)
can be set for the input signal. conditions.

• Selecting one INPUT connector

Verify that the [MIC] key is flashing or out. Then press
Assigning input signals to the INPUT [ON/OFF] key for the connector to which the
recording tracks instrument is connected, so that the key is lit.

This section explains how to select the input source signal

from the INPUT 1/2 connectors and the built-in
microphone, and how to send it to the audio tracks for
recording. INPUT [ON/OFF] key

The MRS-8 allows you to select up to two signals from

the INPUT 1/2 connectors and the built-in mic. The
INPUT 1 connector and the built-in mic are switchable, • Selecting two INPUT connectors
and one of these can be used at a time. The following Verify that the [MIC] key is not lit. Then press one
combinations are possible. INPUT [ON/OFF] key so that the key is lit. Next, hold
down the lit INPUT [ON/OFF] key and press the other
Input source Signal type INPUT [ON/OFF] key.
INPUT 1 connector Mono
INPUT 2 connector Mono
Built-in mic Mono
INPUT 1/2 connectors Stereo
Built-in mic + INPUT 2 INPUT INPUT
Stereo [ON/OFF] [ON/OFF]
connector
key key

NOTE
• The built-in mic can normally only be used when an algorithm
• Selecting only the built-in mic
other than CLEAN, DIST, or ACO/BS SIM is selected for the
Press the [MIC] key so that the key is lit. Then press the
insert effect.
INPUT [ON/OFF] 1 key so that the key is lit.
• When the PRE AMP/DRIVE module is set to CABINET or OFF,
the built-in mic can be used also when one of the above
algorithms is selected for the insert effect.
• The status of the [MIC] key indicates whether the built-in mic
can be used. When the key is flashing, the mic can be used.
When the key is out, the mic cannot be used.

1. When using the INPUT 1/2 connectors, [MIC] key

make sure that the instrument or mic that is
to be recorded is connected to the INPUT
respective input. [ON/OFF]
key

NOTE
When using the INPUT 1 connector, the [INPUT1 SELECT]
switch on the rear panel must be set to the correct position
for the instrument.

56 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 57 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Mixer]

• Selecting the built-in mic and INPUT 2

Press the [MIC] key so that the key is lit. Then hold the
INPUT [ON/OFF] 1 key and press the INPUT [ON/OFF] CLEAN
Standard 0
2 key so that both keys are lit.

6. Use the cursor up/down keys and the dial

to select the effect patch, and press the
[EXIT] key.
The main screen returns.
The level of the signal sent to the recording track(s)
changes according to the insert effect setting. After
switching a patch or changing an effect setting, you
should readjust the recording level as described in steps 7
INPUT INPUT
[ON/OFF] [ON/OFF] – 9.
key key
7. From the main screen, press the [TRACK
PARAMETER] key in the display section,
3. While playing your instrument, adjust the
and then press the INPUT [ON/OFF] key 1
[INPUT] control for the input(s) selected in
or 2.
step 2, to adjust the input sensitivity.
The indication “INPUT” appears on the first line of the
The sensitivity of the built-in mic can be adjusted using
display. This indicates that the track parameters for the
[INPUT] control 1. Make adjustments so that the [PEAK]
input signal are being called up.
indicator flickers slightly when you play your instrument
at its loudest volume.
INPUT
4. To record the sound through the insert EFX SEND 0
effect, press the [INPUT SRC] key in the
effect section and turn the dial to set the
insert position for the effect to IN.
8. Press the cursor down key repeatedly, until
“REC LVL” is shown on the second line of
The insert effect will be applied to the input source. To
the display.
record without the insert effect, press the [INSERT
The input signal recording level can now be adjusted.
EFFECT] key in the effect section repeatedly until the
key is out. (While the key is out, the insert effect will be
bypassed.)
INPUT
REC LVL 100
When the setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to
return to the main screen.
9. While playing your instrument at its loudest
volume, turn the dial to adjust the recording
HINT level.
In the default condition of a project, the insert effect is The REC LVL parameter determines the level of the
inserted into the input, and a patch suitable for guitar/bass
signal sent to the recording track via the insert effect. The
recording is selected.
level after adjustment can be checked on the level meter.
At the highest volume, the 0 (dB) segment of the level
5. To select the patch for the insert effect,
meter should flicker slightly.
press the [INSERT EFFECT] key in the
effect section.
The display changes as follows. In this condition, the
cursor up/down keys select the insert effect algorithm,
and the dial selects the effect patch for the algorithm.

ZOOM MRS-8 57
MRS-8(E).book 58 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Mixer]

• Stereo track or two mono tracks selected

0 (dB) segment
One Input source Recorder
INPUT 1 (built-in mic) Odd-numbered track
or
INPUT 2 Even-numbered track
Input 2 recording level
Input 1 recording level

Two Input sources Recorder

After setting the recording level, press the [EXIT] key to INPUT 1 (built-in mic) Odd-numbered track
return to the main screen.
INPUT 2 Even-numbered track

HINT
When the insert effect is bypassed for recording, setting the
• Recording destination not selected
REC LVL parameter to 100 results in unity gain (recording
level same as input level).
One Input source
10. Press the status key for the track to be INPUT 1 (built-in mic)
PAN

used for recording until the key is lit in red. or

The signal of the selected input source will be sent to the INPUT 2
MASTER
MASTER
OUTPUT
track(s). Up to two mono tracks or one stereo track can be
selected. Tracks 1 - 8
Drum/bass track
When selecting two mono tracks, only odd/even-
numbered pairs can be selected (tracks 1/2 or 3/4). To
select two tracks, repeatedly press the status key for one Two Input sources
track until the key is lit in red, and then hold the key while INPUT 1 (built-in mic)
PAN

pressing the status key for the other track so that it is also
lit in red. INPUT 2
MASTER
MASTER
OUTPUT

The signal flow will change as follows, depending on the Tracks 1 - 8

destination track selection. Drum/bass track

• One mono track selected

HINT
One Input source You can link two mono tracks and use them as a stereo track
Recorder
INPUT 1 (built-in mic) (→ p. 60). In this case, the track parameter PAN functions as
or Track a BALANCE parameter that adjusts the left/right level
INPUT 2
balance.

Two Input sources

INPUT 1 (built-in mic) Recorder
Track
INPUT 2

58 ZOOM MRS-8
all.fm 59 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後６時５１分

Reference [Mixer]

2. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status

Adjusting the signal for keys to select the track/input to be set.
each track (track
parameters) TR 3
EQ HI G 0

The mixer of the MRS-8 lets you adjust various aspects

for each track (called track parameters), such as level,
HINT
panning, EQ, and send/return effect intensity. • When selecting the V-take of stereo tracks (5/6, 7/8), the track
is toggled between odd-numbered track and even-numbered
track with each push of the key.
NOTE
• When selecting the drum track/bass track with the [RHYTHM]
The audio tracks 5/6 and 7/8 and the drum track are stereo
status key, each push of the key toggles the track. The track
tracks. Except for the V-take selection (audio tracks only),
operated with pads or faders is also switched.
the track parameters for these tracks are the same for left
and right.
3. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the
1. From the main screen, press the [TRACK track parameter to adjust.
PARAMETER] key in the display section. The selectable parameters for the respective tracks and
inputs are listed below.

■ Track parameter list

Setting Drum/
Track Track Master
Parameter Display Description bass Input
range 1-4 5-8 track
track
Adjusts high-frequency boost or
cut in the range from -12 to +12
EQ HI GAIN (*) EQ HI G -12 – +12dB O O --- O ---
dB. This parameter is only shown
when HI EQ is on.
EQ HI Adjusts turnover frequency for
500 – 18000 high-frequency boost/cut. This
FREQUENCY EQ HI F O O --- O ---
(Hz) parameter is only shown when HI
(*) EQ is on.
Adjusts low-frequency boost or
EQ LOW cut in the range from -12 to +12
EQ LO G -12 – +12dB O O --- O ---
GAIN (*) dB. This parameter is only shown
when LOW EQ is on.
EQ LOW Adjusts turnover frequency for
low-frequency boost/cut. This
FREQUENCY EQ LO F 40 – 1600 (Hz) O O --- O ---
parameter is only shown when
(*) LOW EQ is on.
EFX SEND Adjusts the level of the signal sent
EFX SEND 0 – 100 O O --- O O
LEVEL (*) to the send/return effect.
Adjusts the panning value (left/
right position) of the track/input
L100 – 0
PAN PAN signal. For stereo tracks, the O O --- O O
–R100 parameter adjusts the left/right
level balance.
Selects the V-take to use for the
x=1 – 8, track (→p. 32). x stands for the
V-TAKE TR x-y O O O --- ---
y=1 – 10 track number and y for the V-take
number.
FADER FADER 0 – 127 Adjusts the fader setting. O O O O ---
REC LVL REC LVL 0 – 127 Adjusts the recording level. --- --- --- --- O
STEREO Controls the stereo link function
ST LINK ON/OFF for linking the parameters of mono O --- --- --- ---
LINK tracks 1/2 or 3/4 (→ p. 60).
(*) : denotes a parameter that can be switched on and off by pressing the [ENTER] key.
O: Valid parameter for this track/input

ZOOM MRS-8 59
MRS-8(E).book 60 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Mixer]

NOTE
When the recording track is selected, the input signal does
Linking two tracks
not pass through the mixer but is supplied directly to the (stereo link)
track. Therefore, if a track is in recording standby mode, the
input track parameter settings will have no effect. (However,
the REC LVL parameter is always active.) In the MRS-8, the parameters of adjacent odd-numbered/
even-numbered mono tracks (1/2 or 3/4) can be linked,
4. Turn the dial to adjust the value. resulting in a pair of stereo tracks. This function is
referred to as “stereo link”. The setting procedure is as
5. To switch EQ HI, EQ LO, or effect send follows.
between on and off, select the respective
parameter (marked with an asterisk in the 1. From the main screen, press the [TRACK
table on the previous page) and press the PARAMETER] key in the display section
[ENTER] key.
Each push of the [ENTER] key toggles between on and 2. Use the cursor left/right keys or the status
off. For example, when switching EQ HI from on to off, keys to select one of the two tracks to
the display changes as follows. stereo-link.

• On condition 3. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up

the following indication on the display.

TR1
EQ HI G 4 TR1
ST LINK OFF

• Off condition
4. Turn the dial to set the parameter to ON.
Stereo linking will be enabled immediately, so that the
TR1 selected track and the adjacent odd-numbered/even-
EQ HI OFF
numbered track are linked. To defeat stereo linking,
return the setting to OFF.
6. Repeat steps 3 – 5 until all desired
parameters are adjusted.
If required, you can use the cursor left/right keys or the TR1/2
ST LINK ON
status keys to change to another track and adjust its
parameters. This is useful to adjust the same parameter
for several tracks. When stereo link is on, track operation will be as follows.
• To adjust the track volume, use the odd-numbered
7. To return to the main screen, press the fader. (The even-numbered fader will have no
[EXIT] key. effect.)
• The PAN parameter of two stereo-linked tracks will
function as a balance parameter that adjusts the
volume balance between the tracks.
• Except for PAN and V-TAKE, the track parameters
for the odd-numbered track will also apply to the
even-numbered track.

5. To return to the main screen, press the

[EXIT] key.

60 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 61 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]
This section explains the functions and operation of the built-in rhythm section of the MRS-8.

About the rhythm section

The rhythm section of the MRS-8 uses internal drum

sound and bass sound sources to generate rhythm
accompaniment. It can be used instead of a metronome
by playing simple rhythm patterns, or you can program a
sequence of rhythm patterns and chord progression into
the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song.

When you select a bass program, a sound of a certain

Drum kits and bass programs pitch is assigned to each pad, and you can play it by
selecting a scale. By switching the scale type, key, and
The rhythm section has two different types of sound, range, you can cover up to four octaves.
created by a “drum kit” and a “bass program”.
The drum kit is a set of 27 drum/percussion sounds such For the rhythm section, you select either the drum kit or
as kick, snare, and hihat. The MRS-8 contains 8 different bass program to be played with the pads. Immediately
drum kits. You can select one of these drum kits and play after creating a new project, the drum kit is selected. The
it manually with the pads on the top panel, or you can use [DRUM/BASS] key is used to toggle between the two
it as a sound source for rhythm accompaniment. sound types. When the [DRUM/BASS] key is lit, the
drum kit is selected. When the key is out, the bass
program is selected for playing.

■ Drum kit selected

Lit

■ Bass program selected

When you select a drum kit, its sounds are assigned to the
nine pads. Such a combination of sounds assigned to the
pads is called a “pad bank”. One drum kit gives access to
three pad banks. Simply by switching the pad bank you
can play other sounds from the current drum kit. Out

A bass program is a single bass sound, such as an electric The output signal from the drum kit (drum track) and the
bass or acoustic bass, which can be played as a scale with output signal from the bass program (bass track) are sent
the pads on the top panel. The MRS-8 has five bass to the internal mixer, where you can use the [RHYTHM]
programs. You can choose one of these and play a scale fader and [RHYTHM] status key to adjust the volume
with the pads, or use it as a sound source for rhythm and switch the signal on and off. (This affects the sound
accompaniment. type currently selected with the [DRUM/BASS] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 61
MRS-8(E).book 62 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Rhythm patterns Rhythm pattern mode and

A project can contain over 500 accompaniment patterns
rhythm song mode
with drum/bass performance data for up to 99 measures The rhythm section can operate in one of two modes:
each. This is called a rhythm pattern. Inside each rhythm “rhythm pattern mode”, in which the currently selected
pattern, the area that holds the drum performance data is rhythm pattern is constantly repeated, and “rhythm song
called the “drum sequence”, and the area that holds the mode”, in which you can create and play an entire rhythm
bass performance data is called the “bass sequence”. song consisting of a sequence of patterns.
Immediately after creating a new project, the rhythm
In the default condition, a project contains preprogrammed pattern mode is selected. By pressing the [SONG/
rhythm patterns in numbers 000 – 472, 509, 510. You can PATTERN] key, you can toggle between the rhythm
edit a portion of a rhythm pattern, or use an empty slot to pattern mode and rhythm song mode. When the [SONG/
create an entirely original rhythm pattern. The rhythm PATTERN] key is out, the rhythm pattern mode is
patterns you modify or create are saved on the SD card as selected. When the key is lit, the rhythm song mode is
part of the project. selected.

Rhythm 1 2 3 4 ■ Rhythm pattern mode

section PATTERN PATTERN
Drum sequence Drum sequence
Bass sequence Bass sequence

Out

Rhythm song
■ Rhythm song mode
Multiple rhythm patterns arranged in a desired order of
playback are collectively called a “rhythm song”. Besides
the rhythm pattern data, a rhythm song comprises
information about various aspects such as chord, tempo,
and time signature to create the accompaniment for an
Lit
entire song. Up to 10 rhythm songs can be programmed
in one project.

PATTERN A
PATTERN B
PATTERN C
PATTERN D
PATTERN E

Rhythm
song
Measure
number
1 2 3 4 5 6
PATTERN A PATTERN E PATTERN B
Drum sequence Drum sequence Drum sequence
Bass sequence Bass sequence Bass sequence
Chords
Am Dm7 G7 C

62 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 63 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

4. To adjust the volume of the drum/bass

Playing rhythm patterns track, use the [RHYTHM] fader.
The [RHYTHM] fader serves to adjust the drum track or
bass track level. When the [DRUM/BASS] key is lit, the
This section explains how to select a rhythm pattern for fader adjusts the drum track. When the key is out, the
playback, and how to change the tempo and sound. fader adjusts the bass program.
Use the [DRUM/BASS] key to toggle the desired setting,
and then operate the [RHYTHM] fader.
Selecting a rhythm pattern
Proceed as follows to select and play one of the more than 5. To mute the sound of the drum track or
500 rhythm patterns. bass track, repeatedly press the [RHYTHM]
status key, until the key is flashing.
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ The [RHYTHM] status key can be used to switch muting
PATTERN] key in the rhythm section on or off for the sound that is currently selected for the
repeatedly, until the key is out. rhythm section. To cancel muting, press the [RHYTHM]
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears. In this status key once more so that the key is lit.
condition, the following information is displayed.
6. To stop rhythm pattern playback, press the
STOP [P] key.
Number of measures of rhythm pattern
Rhythm pattern number
7. To return to the main screen, press the
001#117 [EXIT] key.
MTNs1Vb 1

Rhythm pattern name

HINT
During rhythm pattern playback, it is also possible to play
The indication to the right of the rhythm pattern name drum kit/bass program sounds by hitting the pads.
shows the pad bank (if a drum kit is selected) or the range
(if a bass program is selected). These items can be
changed if desired (→ p. 65).
Changing the tempo
You can change the tempo of the rhythm pattern.
HINT
While the display shows the rhythm section screen, the audio
track status keys (1 – 8 and [MASTER]) are out and cannot HINT
The tempo set here applies to all rhythm patterns. A rhythm
be used.
song for which no tempo information is programmed also will
use this tempo.
2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern to
play.
1. From the main screen or the rhythm pattern
In the default condition of a project, patterns are
screen, press the [TEMPO] key.
programmed in rhythm pattern numbers 000 – 472, 509,
The display changes as follows, and the current tempo is
510.
shown.
3. Press the PLAY [R] key.
The selected rhythm pattern will begin playing TEMPO
repeatedly. If there is one or more recorded audio tracks, BPM= 120.0
these will also be played back. To play the rhythm pattern
only, turn down the faders of the audio tracks.
HINT
You can change the tempo either in playback or stop mode.

ZOOM MRS-8 63
MRS-8(E).book 64 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

2. Turn the dial to adjust the tempo. The currently selected drum kit/bass program name is
The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 40.0 – 250.0 shown.
(BPM).

3. To change the tempo manually, hit the DRUM KIT

[TEMPO] key repeatedly at the desired Standard
tempo. Drum kit name
The average of the key press intervals is determined and
set as the new tempo. BASS PRG
Finger
4. To return to the main screen, press the Bass program name
[EXIT] key repeatedly.

4. Turn the dial to select the drum kit/bass

NOTE program to use.
If you record on the audio tracks while listening to the rhythm The change becomes active immediately.
pattern, and then later change the tempo, the audio track For a list of drum kits/bass programs that can be selected,
content and the rhythm pattern will no longer be see the appendix at the end of this manual.
synchronized. Be sure to decide on the tempo first.

HINT
Changing the drum kit / bass The drum kit/bass program selected here is saved for each
program rhythm pattern. For rhythm songs which do not have drum
kit/bass program information programmed, the sound
You can change the drum kit/bass program used by the selected here will be used.
rhythm section.
5. To return to the main screen, press the
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ [EXIT] key repeatedly.
PATTERN] key.

Using the pads to play drum/

001#117 bass sounds
MTNs1Vb 1
Using the pads on the top panel, you can manually play a
drum kit or bass program.
HINT
Drum kit/bass program switching can be done in rhythm ■ Playing a drum kit with the pads
pattern mode or rhythm song mode.
When playing a drum kit, you can switch between pad
banks, giving you a total of 27 drum/percussion sounds.
2. Press the [SYSTEM/UTILITY] key.
The RHYTHM mode utility menu appears. 1. From the main screen, press the [DRUM/
BASS] key repeatedly, until the key is lit.
When the [DRUM/BASS] key is lit, the pads can be used
UTILITY to play a drum kit. The display changes as follows.
DRUM KIT
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
Sound assigned to pads

the indication “UTILITY DRUM KIT” or

“UTILITY BASS PRG” on the display. Then
Pad=DRUM
PadBank= 1
press the [ENTER] key.

64 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 65 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

HINT
Immediately after creating a new project, the pad bank 1 is Pad=BASS
selected. Major E 1 Range number

Scale type Scale key-note

2. Turn the dial to select the pad bank to use
(1 – 3).
The sounds assigned to the nine pads are switched 2. To change the key-note of the scale, use
immediately. For a list of drum/percussion sounds in each the cursor up/down keys.
pad bank, see the appendix at the end of this manual.
The setting range is C – B in semitone steps. The key-note
specified here is the note that will be played by pad 1.
HINT
• You can also use the cursor up/down keys to switch the pad
bank.
HINT
The sharp symbol is shown as , such as in F# = ,
• The currently selected pad bank number is also shown on the
G# = .
rhythm pattern selection screen.

3. Hit the pads to play.

3. To change the type of the scale, use the
cursor left/right keys.
Use the [RHYTHM] fader and [RHYTHM] status key to
The scale type can be set to Major or Minor.
control the drum kit volume and switch mute on and off
For example, when the key-note of “E” is selected, the
as necessary.
pitch of the pads changes as follows, depending on the
scale type selection.
4. To switch the pad bank during play, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
The pad bank can also be switched while a rhythm pattern Major
or rhythm song is playing. D# E F#
When you press the [EXIT] key, the rhythm pattern or
rhythm song selection screen appears again. A B C#

5. To return to the main screen, press the E F# G#

[EXIT] key repeatedly.
Minor
■ Playing a bass program with the pads D E F#
By switching the scale and range assigned to the pads,
you can play bass programs covering up to four octaves. A B C

E F# G
NOTE
With a bass program, there can be no overlapping of multiple
sounds. If you press another pad while holding down a pad,
4. Turn the dial to change the range to be
the sound of the first pad will stop and the sound of the other played by the pads.
pad is heard. The range of the pads can be selected in four steps (1 – 4).
For example, a change from 1 to 2 will shift the pitch
1. From the main screen, press the [DRUM/ assigned to the pads up by 1 octave.
BASS] key repeatedly, until the key is out.
When the [DRUM/BASS] key is out, the pads can be 5. Hit the pads to play.
used to play a bass program. The display changes as Use the [RHYTHM] fader and [RHYTHM] status key to
follows. control the bass program volume and switch mute on and
off as necessary.

ZOOM MRS-8 65
MRS-8(E).book 66 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

6. To switch the scale type and range during

play, repeat steps 2 – 4. Creating a rhythm pattern
The scale type and range can also be switched while a
rhythm pattern or rhythm song is playing.
When you press the [EXIT] key, the rhythm pattern or This section explains how you can create your own
rhythm song selection screen appears again. rhythm patterns. There are two ways of doing this: real-
time input where you record your play on the pads, and
7. To return to the main screen, press the step input where play is stopped and you enter the sounds
[EXIT] key repeatedly. one by one.

Preparations
Before starting to record, you must make various settings
for the rhythm pattern, such as bar length and time
signature, and quantize value (shortest unit for
recording). By default, an empty rhythm pattern has a 4/
4 time signature and a length of 2 measures.

NOTE
After you have started the rhythm pattern input procedure,
you can no longer change the time signature and number of
measures. Be sure to make these settings beforehand.

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/

PATTERN] key to call up the rhythm pattern
selection screen.
If the [SONG/PATTERN] key is lit, press the key once
more so that it goes out.

001#117
MTNs1Vb 1

2. Turn the dial to select an empty rhythm

pattern.
The indication “EMPTY” appears on the display when an
empty pattern is selected.

---#500
EMPTY 1

HINT
If there is no empty rhythm pattern, erase an unneeded
pattern (→ p. 76).

3. Press the [EDIT] key.

The rhythm pattern edit menu for making various rhythm
pattern settings appears.

66 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 67 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

indicates that the setting has already been fixed and cannot
be changed.
PTN EDIT
QUANTIZE 7. Turn the dial to select the desired setting.
The setting range is 1 – 99 measures.
4. To set the quantize value, make sure that When the setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to
the indication “PTN EDIT QUANTIZE” is return to the rhythm pattern edit menu.
shown on the display, and press the
[ENTER] key. 8. To set the rhythm pattern time signature,
The display changes as follows. use the cursor left/right keys to bring up the
indication “PTN EDIT TimSig” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
QUANTIZE The current time signature setting appears on the display.
16
Quantize value
TimSig
The quantize value is the smallest note unit for recording
4
4/4 beat
a pattern. When performing real-time input, your play is
recorded using the note steps selected here.
The default setting is “16” (a sixteenth note).
HINT
When an already created rhythm pattern is selected, the time
5. Turn the dial to select one of the following signature is enclosed in parenthesises. This indicates that
quantize values. Then press the [EXIT] key. the setting has already been fixed and cannot be changed.

4...........Quarter note 9. Turn the dial to select the beat.

8...........Eighth note The setting range is 1 – 8 (1/4 – 8/4 beats). When the
12.........Eighth triplet note setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key twice to return
16.........Sixteenth note (default) to the rhythm pattern selection screen.
24.........Sixteenth triplet note
32.........Thirty-second note
Hi.........1 tick (1/48 of quarter note) Drum sequence real-time
input
When you press the [EXIT] key, the rhythm pattern edit
menu appears again. For real-time input of a drum sequence, you play the
rhythm pattern on the pads of the MRS-8.
6. To set the number of measures of the
rhythm pattern, use the cursor left/right 1. At the rhythm pattern screen, select an
keys to bring up the indication “PTN EDIT empty rhythm pattern number.
BarLen” on the display, and press the If necessary, select a drum kit (→ p. 64) before carrying
[ENTER] key. out the following steps.
The current length of the pattern is shown as number of
measures. 2. Press the [DRUM/BASS] key repeatedly,
until the key is lit.
The pads can now be used to play a drum kit.
BarLen Immediately after switching the sound, the pad bank
2 selection screen is shown.
Number of measures
3. If necessary, use the cursor up/down keys
to switch the pad bank.
HINT
When the setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to
When an already created rhythm pattern is selected, the
return to the rhythm pattern selection screen.
number of measures is enclosed in parenthesises. This

ZOOM MRS-8 67
MRS-8(E).book 68 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

4. Hold down the REC [O] key and press the

HINT
PLAY [R] key.
• You can use step input to add playing information to a rhythm
A four-beat pre-count (one measure) is heard, and rhythm pattern recorded with real-time input.
pattern recording starts. During recording, a click sound • After concluding real-time input, you can change the quantize
(metronome sound) is heard, according to the tempo and setting and then record on top of the existing sequence.
time signature setting. The current position is shown on (Changing the quantize value will not affect the existing
the counter in measures/beats/ticks. playing information.)

HINT
6. To edit the recorded contents during real-
time input, proceed as follows.
The number and the sound level of the pre-count clicks can
be changed (→ p. 90).
• To erase the performance of a specific pad
5. While listening to the metronome, tap the While holding down the [FUNCTION] key, press the pad
pads. whose sound you want erase. While you are holding
down both keys, the performance of the corresponding
Your performance on the pads will be recorded as a drum
pad is erased from the rhythm pattern.
sequence according to the quantization setting. The
intensity with which you hit the pads will also be
recorded.
When you reach the end of the pattern, the unit
Drum sequence
automatically returns to the first measure, and real-time
input continues. Snare
Kick

Pad Pad Snare

Kick

Pre-count
• To erase the performance of all pads
Recorded repeatedly
While holding down the [FUNCTION] key, press the
[RHYTHM] status key. While you are holding down both
• Switching the pad bank during real-time input keys, the performance of all pads is erased from the drum
of a drum sequence sequence.
Press the [DRUM/BASS] key once to bring up the pad
bank selection screen, and use the cursor up/down keys to
select the pad bank. To return, press the [EXIT] key.
Drum sequence
• Switching to a bass sequence during real- Snare
time input of a drum sequence Kick
Press the [DRUM/BASS] key once to bring up the pad
bank selection screen, and then press the [DRUM/BASS]
key once more so that the key goes out.
Snare
Kick
• Temporarily pausing real-time input
Press the REC [O] key during recording so that the key
is flashing. In this state you can tap the pads to check 7. When you have finished real-time
which sound is assigned to each pad. Recording resumes recording, press the STOP [P] key.
when you press the REC [O] key once more.
Rhythm pattern recording will stop. Press the PLAY [R]
key to hear the pattern that you recorded.

68 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 69 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

also be recorded.
HINT
When you reach the end of the pattern, the unit
When you select an empty pattern and record it, the pattern
automatically returns to the first measure, and real-time
name “Patxxx” (where xxx is the pattern number) is
automatically assigned. You can edit this pattern name as
input continues.
necessary (→ p. 75).
• Switching the range and scale during real-
time input of a bass sequence
Bass sequence real-time Press the [DRUM/BASS] key once to bring up the range/
input scale selection screen, and use the cursor keys and the
dial to select the range and scale. To return, press the
For real-time input of a bass sequence, you play the pads [EXIT] key.
of the MRS-8.
• Switching to a drum sequence during real-
1. At the rhythm pattern screen, select an time input of a bass sequence
empty rhythm pattern number or a rhythm Press the [DRUM/BASS] key once to bring up the range/
pattern number where only a drum scale selection screen, and then press the [DRUM/BASS]
sequence has been recorded. key once more so that the key is lit.
If necessary, select a bass program (→ p. 64) before
carrying out the following steps. • Temporarily pausing real-time input
Press the REC [O] key during recording so that the key
2. Press the [DRUM/BASS] key repeatedly, is flashing. In this state you can tap the pads to check
until the key is out. which note is assigned to each pad. Recording resumes
The pads can now be used to play a bass program. when you press the REC [O] key once more.
Immediately after switching the sound, the range and
scale selection screen is shown.
HINT
You can use step input to add playing information to a
3. If necessary, select the scale type, key- rhythm pattern recorded with real-time input.
note, and range.
Use the cursor keys to select the scale type and key-note, 6. To edit the recorded contents during real-
and use the dial to select the range. When the setting is time input, proceed as follows.
complete, press the [EXIT] key to return to the rhythm
pattern selection screen. • To erase the performance of a specific pad
While holding down the [FUNCTION] key, press the pad
4. Hold down the REC [O] key and press the whose note you want erase. While you are holding down
PLAY [R] key. both keys, the performance of the corresponding pad is
A four-beat pre-count (one measure) is heard, and rhythm erased from the rhythm pattern.
pattern recording starts. (During recording, the
metronome click sound is heard, according to the tempo
and time signature.)
The current position is shown on the counter in measures/ Bass sequence
beats/ticks.

HINT
The number and the sound level of the pre-count clicks can
be changed.

5. While listening to the metronome, tap the

pads.
Your performance on the pads will be recorded as a bass • To erase the performance of all pads
sequence according to the quantization setting. The While holding down the [FUNCTION] key, press the
duration and intensity with which you hit the pads will [RHYTHM] status key. While you are holding down both

ZOOM MRS-8 69
MRS-8(E).book 70 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

keys, the performance of all pads is erased from the bass If you only press the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP) key,
sequence. no playing information is entered, but the step advances
by an interval corresponding to the current quantize
value. This becomes a rest (see illustration below).

Bass sequence
1. At the rhythm pattern screen, select an
empty rhythm pattern number.

2. Press the [DRUM/BASS] key repeatedly,

until the key is lit.
The pads can now be used to play a drum kit.
Immediately after switching the sound, the pad bank
selection screen is shown.

7. When you have finished real-time 3. If necessary, select the pad bank to use.
recording, press the STOP [P] key. When the setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to
Rhythm pattern recording will stop. Press the PLAY [R] return to the rhythm pattern selection screen.
key to hear the pattern that you recorded.
4. Press the REC [O] key.
HINT The key lights up and the display changes as follows. In
You can switch the drum kit/bass program during real-time this condition, drum sequence step input is possible.
recording (→ p. 64), and you can change the volume of the
metronome click (→ p. 90). Quantize setting
Current pad bank

Drum sequence step input Q=16

1
For step input, you enter each note separately, while the 1- 1- 0
rhythm pattern is in the stop condition. This makes it easy Measure Tick
to enter even complex drum patterns or bass lines that Beat
might be difficult to achieve with real-time input.
For drum sequence step input, you specify the step length During drum sequence step input, the first line of the
(interval to next note or rest) using the quantize value. display shows the quantize value, and the second line
Then you enter notes and rests. shows the currently selected pad bank number. The
When you hit a pad and then press the PLAY [ R ] counter shows the current position in measures/beats/
(RHYTHM STEP) key, playing (note) information is ticks.
entered at that point, and the step advances by an interval
corresponding to the current quantize value. The intensity
with which you hit the pad is also recorded.

Drum sequence step input

Quantize: quarter note Quantize: sixteenth note

70 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 71 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

5. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the enter more sounds.
quantize value. When you use the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP) key to
This setting becomes the length of one step. The quantize move step by step through a recorded rhythm pattern, the
setting can be changed at any time during step input, pad recorded at the respective position lights up.
using the cursor up/down keys.
You can edit the recorded sequence as follows.
4...........Quarter note
8...........Eighth note • Erasing an entered note
12.........Eighth triplet note Repeatedly press the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP) key
16.........Sixteenth note to move to the position to erase. Then hold down the
24.........Sixteenth triplet note [FUNCTION] key and press the respective pad. The note
32.........Thirty-second note recorded at that point is erased, and the pad goes out.
Hi.........1 tick (1/48 of quarter note)

HINT
HINT During step input, you can use the [DRUM/BASS] key to call
The quantize value setting is linked to the quantize setting for up the pad bank selection screen and switch the pad bank.
real-time input. If you change one setting, the other will also (To return, press the [EXIT] key.)
change.

NOTE
6. To enter a note, hit the pad corresponding
When searching for a note to erase, set the quantize value to
to the note, and then press the PLAY [R] the same value as the smallest value used during recording,
(RHYTHM STEP) key. or to a smaller value. Otherwise the start of a note may be
The pad lights up, and the unit advances by one step. missed.

9. When you have finished step input, press

Q=4 the STOP [P] key.
1
1- 2- 0
The REC [ O ] key goes out and the rhythm pattern
selection screen appears again. By pressing the PLAY
[ R ] key you can check the rhythm pattern that you
recorded.
HINT
• The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded in the
drum sequence. 10. To return to the main screen, press the
• If you hit several pads during input, multiple sounds will be [EXIT] key repeatedly.
recorded at the same position.

7. To enter a rest, press only the PLAY [R]

Bass sequence step input
(RHYTHM STEP) key.
Compared to the drum sequence step input, the step input
If you press the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP) key by
procedure for a bass sequence is somewhat more
itself, the position advances by one step, but no play
complex, because there are the additional elements of
information is recorded.
“pitch” and “duration”.
As for drum track step input, you specify the step length
Q=4 (interval to next note or rest) using the quantize value, and
1 you use the pads and the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP)
1- 3- 0 key to enter notes and rests. But when you input a note,
you must also specify the duration parameter. This
parameter allows you to vary the actual duration for each
8. Repeat steps 5 – 7 while changing the step note, while keeping the step length the same (see diagram
length as necessary, to enter the desired on next page).
rhythm pattern.
When you reach the end of the pattern, the unit
automatically returns to the first measure, letting you

ZOOM MRS-8 71
MRS-8(E).book 72 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Bass sequence step input

Quantize: quarter note Quantize: eighth note Quantize: quarter note Quantize: eighth note
Duration: quarter note Duration: eighth note Duration: quarter note Duration: sixteenth note

1. At the rhythm pattern screen, select an 6. Turn the dial to select the duration value, as
empty rhythm pattern number or a rhythm listed below.
pattern number where only a drum The duration is specified as “ x 1”, i.e. as multiples of a
sequence has been recorded. quarter note. Depending on the value, the actual duration
becomes as follows.
2. Press the [DRUM/BASS] key repeatedly,
until the key is out. 1 – 8..... quarter note x 1 – 8
The pads can now be used to play a bass program. 3/2........ dotted quarter note
Immediately after switching the sound, the range and 1/2........ 8th note
scale selection screen is shown. 3/4........ dotted 8th note
1/3........ 8th note triplet
3. If necessary, select the scale type, key, and 1/4........ 16th note
range. 1/6........ 16th note triplet
When the setting is complete, press the [EXIT] key to 1/8........ 32nd note
return to the rhythm pattern selection screen. 1/12...... 32nd note triplet
1/16...... 64th note
4. Press the REC [O] key. 1/24...... 64th note triplet
The key lights up and the display changes as follows. In
this condition, bass sequence step input is possible. 7. To enter a note, hit the pad corresponding
to the note, and then press the PLAY [R]
(RHYTHM STEP) key.
Quantize setting Current range number
The note is recorded, and the unit advances by the step
Q=16 duration set in step 5.
D= x1/4 E 1
1- 1- 0

Duration setting Tick Q=4

Measure Beat D= x1 E 1
1- 2- 0

During bass sequence step input, the first line of the

display shows the quantize value, and the second line HINT
shows the duration setting and the currently selected The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded in
range. The counter shows the current position in the bass sequence.

measures/beats/ticks.

5. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the

quantize value.
This setting becomes the length of one step.

72 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 73 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

8. To enter a rest, press only the PLAY [R]

(RHYTHM STEP) key.
Entering rhythm pattern
If you press the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP) key by chord information
itself, the position advances by one step (duration of When you have recorded a rhythm pattern, and you later
quantize value) but no play information is recorded. set the chord information (root + chord type), the bass
sequence of the rhythm pattern will also be transformed
according to the chord information programmed in a
Q=4 rhythm song.
D= x1 E 1
1- 3- 0

HINT
9. Repeat steps 5 – 8 while changing the For patterns not used in a rhythm song or for which no bass
sequence is input, this procedure is not necessary.
quantize value and duration as necessary,
to enter the desired bass pattern.
When you reach the end of the pattern, the unit
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
PATTERN] key in the rhythm section
automatically returns to the first measure, letting you
repeatedly, until the key is out.
continue the input.
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears.
You can edit the recorded sequence as follows.
2. Turn the dial to select the pattern for which
• Erasing an entered note to specify chord information, and press the
Repeatedly press the PLAY [R] (RHYTHM STEP) key [EDIT] key.
to move to the position to erase. Then hold down the The rhythm pattern edit menu appears.
[FUNCTION] key and press the respective pad. The note
recorded at that point is erased, and the pad goes out.
PTN EDIT
QUANTIZE
HINT
During step input, you can use the [DRUM/BASS] key to call 3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
up the range selection screen and switch the range and
the indication “EDIT OrgRoot” on the
scale. (To return, press the [EXIT] key.)
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
This screen allows you to specify the root for the selected
NOTE rhythm pattern.
When searching for a note to erase, set the quantize value to
the same value as the smallest value used during recording,
or to a smaller value. Otherwise the start of a note may be Org Root
missed. E
Chord root
10. When you have finished step input, press
the STOP [P] key.
4. Turn the dial to select the root for the chord.
The REC [ O ] key goes out and the rhythm pattern
The available range is C – B (default setting: E). When
selection screen appears again. By pressing the PLAY
setting chord information for a rhythm song, the value
[ R ] key you can check the rhythm pattern that you
specified here will become the root for transposing up or
recorded.
down.

11. To return to the main screen, press the 5. When the setting is complete, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly.
[EXIT] key.
The rhythm pattern edit menu appears again.

ZOOM MRS-8 73
MRS-8(E).book 74 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

6. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up 3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
the indication “PTN EDIT OrgChord” on the the indication “PTN EDIT DR LEVEL” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key. display, and press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows. The display changes as follows. This screen allows you to
specify the drum sequence volume.
The display shows the current volume setting (0 – 15).
OrgChord
Major
DR LEVEL
This screen allows you to specify the chord type for that
15
rhythm pattern.
4. Turn the dial to select the desired setting,
7. Turn the dial to select the chord. and then press the [EXIT] key.
For the chord type, you can select Major or Minor. The setting is entered, and the previous screen appears
again.
For example, if you have entered a bass phrase with a G
major chord in mind, set the root to “G” and the chord 5. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
type to “Major”. the indication “PTN EDIT BS LEVEL” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
8. When the setting is complete, press the The display changes as follows. This screen allows you to
[EXIT] key. specify the bass sequence volume. The display shows the
The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu current volume setting (0 – 15).
appears again.

9. To return to the main screen, press the BS LEVEL

[EXIT] key repeatedly.
15
6. Turn the dial to select the desired setting,
Changing the drum/bass and then press the [EXIT] key.
sequence volume level The setting is entered, and the previous screen appears
again.
The playback volume of the rhythm pattern can be
adjusted separately for the drum and bass with the 7. To return to the main screen, press the
[RHYTHM] fader. If necessary, the volume levels can [EXIT] key repeatedly.
also be individually programmed for each rhythm
pattern.

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/

PATTERN] key in the rhythm section
repeatedly, until the key is out.
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears.

2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern

for which to specify volume information,
and press the [EDIT] key.
The rhythm pattern edit menu appears.

PTN EDIT
QUANTIZE

74 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 75 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Assigning a name to a rhythm

Editing rhythm patterns
pattern
When an empty rhythm pattern is selected and used for
This section explains how to copy an existing rhythm
input, the pattern name “Pat xxx” (where xxx is the
pattern or how to erase the playing information and return
pattern number) is automatically assigned. You can edit
the pattern to the blank condition.
this pattern name as necessary.

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ Copying a rhythm pattern
PATTERN] key in the rhythm section
repeatedly, until the key is out. You can copy the currently selected rhythm pattern to
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears. another pattern number. This is useful to create variations
of a rhythm pattern.
2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern
for which to edit the name, and press the 1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
[EDIT] key. PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is
The rhythm pattern edit menu appears. out.
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears.

PTN EDIT 2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern to

QUANTIZE use as copy source.

3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up 3. Press the [FUNCTION] key in the control
the indication “PTN EDIT NAME” on the section twice.
display, and press the [ENTER] key. The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can
The display changes as follows. This screen allows you to select the number of the copy destination rhythm pattern.
specify a name for the selected rhythm pattern.

COPY
PTN NAME 117å420E
117 420E
Pat 500
4. Turn the dial to select the number of the
rhythm pattern to use as copy destination.
4. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
When an empty pattern is selected, the indication “E” is
flashing position to the character to
shown to the right of the pattern number.
change, and turn the dial or use the rhythm
section pads and keys to select a
character. NOTE
For information on how to input characters, refer to page When you select a recorded rhythm pattern as destination,
33. its contents will be overwritten with the data of the copy
source.

HINT 5. To carry out the copy operation, press the

By repeatedly pressing the [EDIT] key, you can clear all [ENTER] key. When the indication “COPY
characters.
SURE?” appears, press the [ENTER] key
once more.
5. Repeat step 4 until the name is as desired.
When the copy operation is completed, the display
returns to the rhythm pattern selection screen. By
6. To return to the main screen, press the pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, you
[EXIT] key repeatedly. can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time.

ZOOM MRS-8 75
MRS-8(E).book 76 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

6. To return to the main screen, press the

[EXIT] key repeatedly. Creating a rhythm song

Erasing a rhythm pattern A rhythm song consists of a sequence of rhythm patterns

with programmed chord and tempo information. The
This section explains how to erase all data from a MRS-8 allows you to save up to 10 rhythm songs per
specified rhythm pattern, returning it to the blank state. project. While the [SONG/PATTERN] key is lit, one of
these can be selected for editing or playing.
NOTE
It is not possible to restore data once the rhythm pattern has
The following two methods are available for entering
been erased. Use this operation with care. rhythm pattern information into a rhythm song.

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ ■ Step input

PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is With this method, you line up rhythm patterns one by one
out. by specifying a pattern and the number of measures.
The rhythm pattern selection screen appears. Input can be performed at any point in the song. It is also
possible to switch to another pattern while the previous
2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern to pattern is still playing. This mode is suitable for
erase. specifying patterns in detail.

3. Press the [FUNCTION] key in the control ■ FAST (Formula Assisted Song Translator)
section. This method uses simple formulas to specify rhythm
The display changes as follows. pattern playback from start to end. The result is written to
the song in a single operation. Because input midway
through a song is not possible with this method, it is most
DELETE suitable for cases where the configuration of the entire
SURE? song has been decided beforehand.

4. To carry out the erase operation, press the

HINT
[ENTER] key.
There is no difference in the completed rhythm song due to
When the erase operation is completed, the display input method that was used, i.e. a song will be the same,
returns to the rhythm pattern selection screen. By regardless of whether it was created using step input or the
pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, you FAST method. If necessary, you can first create a rough
can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time. version of a song using FAST and then perform detailed
editing using step input.
5. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly.
Selecting a rhythm song
Out of the 10 available songs, select the rhythm song for
editing or playing as follows.

HINT
In the default condition of a project, all rhythm songs are
empty.

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/

PATTERN] key in the rhythm section
repeatedly, until the key is lit.
The rhythm section switches to rhythm song mode, and

76 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 77 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

the rhythm song selection screen appears.

Current position
Rhythm song number 1 (measure number)
Rhythm End of Song
SongNo0E song
EMPTY
Rhythm song name
3. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up
the indication “←PTN” on the first line of
When the rhythm song is empty, the indication the display.
“EMPTY” is shown in the rhythm song name field, and
the indication “E” is shown to the right of the rhythm
song number. åPTN
EOS
2. Turn the dial to select a rhythm song 1- 1- 0

number from 0 – 9.
During step input, the cursor up/down keys serve to bring
3. To return to the main screen, press the
up various kinds of information about events that are
[EXIT] key.
programmed at the current point. For example, when
“PTN” is shown, rhythm pattern information can be
Entering pattern information entered for the rhythm song. The following items can be
selected.
using step input
Parameter Description
This section explains how to input rhythm pattern data
EV→ Event information at current point
into an empty rhythm song by specifying the rhythm PTN Rhythm pattern number
pattern number and number of measures. TimSig Time signature
ROOT Chord root
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ CHORD Chord type
PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit. TEMPO Tempo
The rhythm section switches to rhythm song mode, and DrLevel Drum sequence volume
the rhythm song selection screen appears. BsLevel Bass sequence volume
Dr KIT Drum kit number
2. Press the REC [O] key in the transport Bs PRG Bass program number

section.
The key lights up and the display changes as follows. In HINT
this condition, you can perform rhythm song step input. When an item other than “EV→” is selected and no
information is input for the current position, the arrow “←” is
shown before the item name. This indicates that information
EVå
EV input at a preceding point continues to be valid.
EOS
1- 1- 0
4. Press the [FUNCTION] key in the control
End-of-song indication Current position section.
The indication “INSERT?” appears on the first line of the
The indication “EOS” (End of Song) shows the position display.
where the rhythm song ends. For an empty song, “EOS”
will be located at the beginning. Therefore nothing
happens if you play the song.
INSERT?
P000x 4
Rhythm pattern
number to insert
Number of measures to insert

ZOOM MRS-8 77
MRS-8(E).book 78 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

In this condition, you can input rhythm pattern

information for the current point. Current position
(Measure number)
1 2 3
5. Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern to Rhythm
song PATTERN 002 End of Song
insert.

6. Use the cursor up/down keys to specify the

number of measures to insert. HINT
• The REW [T] and FF [Y] keys in the transport section can be
If you specify more measures than the original length of
used to move the current position in beat units.
the rhythm pattern, the rhythm pattern will be repeated. If • When “EV→” is shown on the display, turning the dial moves
you specify fewer measures, the song will switch to the the current position in sixteenth note units. By bringing up the
next rhythm pattern before the current pattern has “EV→” indication to move to a point within a measure and
finished playing. then using the cursor up/down keys to display event
information, you can enter event information in sixteenth note
7. To finalize the setting, press the [ENTER] units (→ p. 83).
key.
The rhythm pattern information will be input at the 9. Repeat steps 4 – 8 to enter all required
current location, and the display reverts to the original pattern information.
screen. The “EOS” indication is moved back by the
number of measures that were inserted. 10. When all required pattern information has
been entered, press the STOP [P] key.
The REC [O] key goes out and the rhythm song selection
PTN 002 screen appears again. If you press the PLAY [R] key, the
08Beat03 created rhythm song will be played.
1- 1- 0
To edit the entered rhythm pattern information, proceed
as follows.
Current position
(measure number) • Selecting a different rhythm pattern
1 2 3
Use the cursor left/right keys to move to the point where
Rhythm
song PATTERN 002 End of Song the respective rhythm pattern information is input, and
then turn the dial to select the new rhythm pattern.
By turning the dial at a point where no rhythm pattern
By pressing the PLAY [R] key while this display is
information is input (“←PTN” is shown), you can add
shown, you can repeatedly play the rhythm pattern
new rhythm pattern information for this point.
entered at the current point.
The newly selected rhythm pattern information will
always be valid until the point where the next rhythm
8. Repeatedly press the cursor right key to
pattern information is input.
move to the measure number for which
“EOS” is shown on the second line of the
• Deleting entered rhythm pattern information
display.
Use the cursor left/right keys to move to the position of
During rhythm song step input, you can use the cursor
the rhythm pattern information to delete, and press the
left/right keys to move the input position in measure
[FUNCTION] key twice. (The indication “EV ERASE
units. When you reach the end of the song, the indication
SURE?” appears.) Then press the [ENTER] key. When
“EOS” is shown on the second line of the display.
rhythm pattern information was deleted, the previous
pattern will remain valid until the point where the next
åPTN rhythm pattern information is input.
EOS
3- 1- 0
Delete

PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN C

PATTERN A PATTERN C

78 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 79 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

• Inserting a rhythm pattern in a song

Use the cursor left/right keys to move to the point where
Using FAST for pattern
the rhythm pattern should be inserted, and perform steps information input
4 – 7. A new rhythm pattern is inserted at the current
The FAST (Formula Assisted Song Translator) method
location, and all subsequent patterns are moved back by
developed by ZOOM uses simple formulas to specify
the duration of the inserted pattern.
rhythm pattern sequences and write an entire rhythm
song in one operation.
Insert The following keys and pads can be used for numeric
PATTERN D input.

PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN C

[x+] key
PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN D PATTERN C
Enters the "+" (plus symbol)
for lining up patterns and [( )] key
the "x" (multiplication Enters the opening and
symbol) for repeated play of closing brackets used
• Deleting a specific measure the same pattern. for linking several
patterns.
Use the cursor left/right keys to move to the start position
of the measure to delete. Press the [FUNCTION] key
three times. (The indication “MEAS DEL SURE?”
appears.) Then press the [ENTER] key. The measure at
the current position is deleted, and subsequent rhythm
pattern information moves forward. When a measure at
the beginning of a rhythm pattern (such as the first
measure of a 2-measure pattern) is deleted, that measure
only is deleted, and the indication changes to “←PTN”
for the second measure.

Pads 1 - 9 / [0] key

Delete 1 measure Serve for specifying pattern numbers and
repetition count.
PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN D PATTERN C

The basic rules for creating a rhythm pattern sequence are

PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN C
as follows.

• Line up patterns
Use the “+” symbol to line up rhythm patterns. For
example, entering 0 + 1 + 2 will result in the following
rhythm pattern play sequence.

PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2

• Repeat patterns
Use the “x” (multiplication) symbol to specify pattern
repetitions. As in normal arithmetic, “x” takes
precedence over “+”. For example, entering 0 + 1 x 2 + 2
will result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence.

PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2

ZOOM MRS-8 79
MRS-8(E).book 80 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

• Repeat multiple patterns

HINT
Use the “(“ and “)” symbols (opening and closing
• If the formula does not fit on two lines, the indication scrolls
brackets) to link a group of patterns for repetition.
by one character each. If you use the cursor left/right keys to
Formulas enclosed in brackets take precedence over other move the input position, the line scrolls left and right
formulas. For example, entering 0 + (1 + 2) x 2 + 3 will accordingly.
result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence. • For FAST input, the leading zeros 0 and 00 can be omitted. For
example, pattern 001 is specified as “1”, and pattern 050 as
“50”.
PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 • The entered formula is saved as part of a project. By calling up
the formula later, you can edit it or use it to write the song.

PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 PATTERN 3

NOTE
• The FAST method can only be used to write a song in one go,
An example for creating the rhythm pattern sequence from beginning to end. Entering rhythm patterns partly into
0 + (1+2) x 4 is shown below. the song is not possible.
• To edit a rhythm song that was written with this method, edit
the formula and then write the entire song again, or use step
0 input.

1. Press the [SONG/PATTERN] key

repeatedly, until the key is lit.
0+
The rhythm section switches to the rhythm song mode,
Press twice and the rhythm song selection screen appears.

0+( 2. Press the [EDIT] key.

The rhythm song edit menu appears.

0+(1
SongEdit
TRANSPOS
0+(1+ 3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
Press twice the indication “SongEdit FAST” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
0+(1+2 A cursor appears on the first line of the display, and FAST
input is possible.

0+(1+2)
Press twice
±
Cursor
0+(1+2)x
4. Use the pads and keys of the rhythm
section to enter the formula for creating the
0+(1+2)x rhythm song.
4
0+(1+2)x
4

80 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 81 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

If you make a mistake during input, you can correct it as

follows.
Entering chord information
This section explains how to add chord information (root
• Deleting a number/symbol and chord type) data to the rhythm song that you have
Use the cursor left/right keys to move the flashing created by inputting rhythm pattern data. When playing a
segment to the number/symbol to delete, and press the rhythm song for which chord information was input, the
[EDIT] key. bass sequence will change according to the chord
progression.
• Inserting a number/symbol
Use the cursor left/right keys to move the flashing
segment to the point where you want to insert a number HINT
• If the original root of the rhythm pattern and the root specified
or symbol, and input the new number/symbol with the
for the rhythm song are different, the bass sequence phrase
pads and keys.
will be transposed according to the root input for the rhythm
song.
5. When formula input is completed, press the
• If the original chord type of the rhythm pattern and the chord
[ENTER] key. type specified for the rhythm song are different, the bass
The display changes as follows. In this condition, you can sequence phrase will be converted according to the chord
select the rhythm song number into which to write the type input for the rhythm song. (Depending on the phrase and
song. chord type, there may be no change.)

1. Bring up the rhythm song selection screen

SaveSong and turn the dial to select the rhythm song
0E for which to enter chord information.
Rhythm song number
2. Press the REC [O] key.
The key lights up and rhythm song step input becomes
HINT possible.
When you select an empty rhythm song number, the
indication “E” is shown to the right of the number.
3. Use the cursor up/down keys to bring up
the indication “ROOT” on the first line of the
NOTE display.
When you select an existing rhythm song as write You can now enter the chord root for the rhythm pattern
destination, the contents of that rhythm song will be played at this point.
overwritten. At a point where rhythm pattern information is already
input, the chord information “E--” (root: E, chord type:
6. Turn the dial to select the destination no conversion) is automatically assigned. Therefore, for a
rhythm song, and press the [ENTER] key. rhythm song without entered chord information, the
The write operation is carried out, and the rhythm song phrase of the pattern is unchanged and the root is
edit menu appears again. transposed to E.
To check the result, press the [EXIT] key to return to the
rhythm song selection screen, select the rhythm song that
you have written, and press the PLAY [R] key. ROOT
E --
1- 1- 0
7. To return to the main screen, press the
Chord type
[EXIT] key repeatedly.
Chord root

4. Turn the dial to specify the note name (C –

B) that will be the root of the chord.
The following screen shows an example of changing the
chord root to A.

ZOOM MRS-8 81
MRS-8(E).book 82 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

indication “EV→” on the display, and turn the dial to

move forward or backward in 12-tick (16th note) units.
ROOT
A -- If necessary, you can also input chord information at a
1- 1- 0
point within a measure, as shown below (smallest unit:
sixteenth note). To do this, bring up the indication
“EV→” on the first line of the display, turn the dial to
HINT move current point, and then bring up the chord
During chord information input, you can press the PLAY [R]
information input screen again.
key to check the rhythm pattern. The pattern will be played
with the new chord setting applied. To stop play, press the
STOP [P] key. Em Am B7 Em Am
Measure 1 2 3 4

5. To change the chord type, press the cursor Beat

PATTERN A PATTERN B

down key once to bring up the indication 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

“CHORD” on the first line of the display.

You can now input the chord type.
HINT
At a point where no chord information is input, “←” is shown
to the left of the “ROOT” or “CHORD” indication. This means
CHORD that the immediately preceding information continues to be
A -- valid.

6. Turn the dial to select the chord type from 8. Input the remaining chord information in
the following options. the same way.
If you have made a mistake or want to make a change,
Display Description Display Description proceed as follows.
No change
• To change chord information
Move to the location at which the chord information is
input, use the cursor up/down keys to switch the display
to “ROOT” or “CHORD”, and turn the dial to change the
chord information.

• To delete chord information

Move to the location at which the chord information is
7. Move to the location where you want to
input, and use the cursor up/down keys to show the chord
input the next chord information, and input
information to delete. Press the [FUNCTION] key twice.
chord information in the same way as
(The indication “EV ERASE SURE?” appears.) When
described in steps 3 – 6.
you press the [ENTER] key, the chord information will be
You can move the input location during rhythm song step deleted, and the display changes to “← ROOT” or “←
input in the following ways. CHORD”.

• Moving in steps of a measure 9. When you have finished, press the STOP
Use the cursor left/right keys to move to the beginning of [P] key.
the preceding or following measure. The unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen. By
pressing the PLAY [R] key in this condition, you can
• Moving in steps of a beat check the rhythm song with the new chord information.
Use the REW [T]/FF [Y] keys to move to the beginning To return to the main screen, press the [EXIT] key.
of the preceding or following beat.

• Moving in steps of a sixteenth note

Repeatedly press the cursor up key to bring up the

82 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 83 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Entering other information

Event type Symbol Description Setting range
A rhythm song contains information about rhythm
Rhythm pattern 000 – 510
patterns, chord, tempo, time signature etc. in a matrix PTN number
configuration, as shown at the bottom of this page. This is TimSig
Time signature 1 – 8(1/4 – 8/4)
(beat)
called event information. When the rhythm song is in the
ROOT Chord root C–B
step input condition, you can move the current position
with the cursor left/right keys etc. and use the cursor up/ --, Maj, m, 7, m7,
M7, aug, dim,
down keys to call up and enter or edit event information. CHORD Chord type 7sus4, sus4, m7b5,
m6, 6, m9, M9,
mM7
1. Bring up the rhythm song selection screen
TEMPO Tempo 40.0 – 250.0
and turn the dial to select the rhythm song
for which to enter chord information. Drum sequence 0 – 15
DrVOL volume
BsVOL Bass sequence 0 – 15
2. Press the REC [O] key. volume
The key lights up and rhythm song step input becomes DrKIT Drum kit See appendix
possible. BsPRG Bass program See appendix

3. Use the cursor up key to bring up the

indication “EV→” on the first line of the HINT
display. • Time signature information can be entered only at the
This screen lets you check which event information is beginning of a measure.
entered at the current point. The symbol after “EV→” • If no tempo information is input for the rhythm song, the
tempo currently set for the rhythm section will be used. To
(such as “Pt” or “TS”) denotes the type of event.
ensure that a rhythm song will always play with the same
tempo, be sure to enter tempo information at the beginning of
the song.
EVå
EV
1- 1- 0 4. Move to the location where you want to
Entered event type input a new event.
For details on how to move the current location, refer to
Available events and their symbols are listed in the table page 82.
below.
5. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the
type of event to input.
If the event you select here has been input at the current
location, its value will be displayed.

Measure 1 2 3 4 5
Pattern PATTERN 001 PATTERN 020

Time signature 4/4

Root/chord D maj G min A7

Tempo BPM-135

Drum track volume 10

Bass track volume 10

Drum kit number 0

Bass program number 0

ZOOM MRS-8 83
MRS-8(E).book 84 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Playing a rhythm song

DrLevel
15
This section explains how to select and play one of the 10
If there is no corresponding event, the display will rhythm songs that were created by inputting rhythm
indicate “←xxx” (where xxx is the event name). This pattern and chord information.
indicates that the previously input event information still
applies. 1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit.
The rhythm song selection screen appears.
åTempo
SongNo0
6. Turn the dial to input the event value.
SONG000
2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm song, and
HINT then press the PLAY [R] key.
During rhythm song step input, you can press the PLAY [R]
The selected rhythm song will begin playing. If
key to check the rhythm pattern. The pattern will be played
something has been recorded on the audio tracks, those
with the current setting applied. To stop play, press the STOP
tracks will play back simultaneously.
[P] key.

7. Input the remaining events in the same way. HINT

To input more information for the same type of event, you It is also possible to play a drum kit or bass program
can move the current position in measures or beats while manually during rhythm song playback by hitting the pads.
the event input screen is displayed.
If you make a mistake or want to change the information,
NOTE
the events can be edited in the following ways.
If you select an empty rhythm song for which an “E” is shown
to the right of the song number, nothing will be played back.
• To change an event setting
Display the event to change, and turn the dial to alter the 3. To stop the rhythm song, press the STOP
setting. [P] key.

• To delete event information

4. To return to the main screen, press the
Display the event to delete, and press the [FUNCTION]
[EXIT] key.
key twice. (The indication “EV ERASE SURE?”
appears.) Then press the [ENTER] key.

8. When you have finished, press the STOP

[P] key.
The REC [ O ] key goes out, and the rhythm song
selection screen appears again. To return to the main
screen, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly.

84 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 85 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

5. Turn the dial to select the measure to use

Editing a rhythm song as copy source start point, and press the
[ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows. This screen lets you
This section explains how to edit a rhythm song that you specify the measure to be used as copy source end point.
have created.

COPY
Copying a specified range of END
measures 1- 1- 0

Copy source end point

Part of a rhythm song can be copied in measures and
inserted into another location. This is convenient to repeat
a portion of a rhythm song.
6. Turn the dial to select the measure to use
as copy source end point, and press the
[ENTER] key.
Copy The copy range is specified, and the screen for selecting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 the copy destination appears.
PATTERN A PATTERN A PATTERN A PATTERN B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 COPY
PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN A PATTERN A PATTERN B TO
1- 1- 0
Copy
Copy destination start point
1 2 3 4
PATTERN A PATTERN B

7. Turn the dial to select the measure to use

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 as copy destination start point.
PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN A PATTERN B

8. To carry out the copy process, press the

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ [ENTER] key.
PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit. The “EOS” marker is shifted back by the number of
The rhythm song selection screen appears. copied measures.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
edit. time.

3. Press the REC [O] key. 9. Press the STOP [P] key.
The key lights up and rhythm song step input is possible. The unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen. To
return to the main screen, press the [EXIT] key.
4. Repeatedly press the [FUNCTION] key to
bring up the indication “COPY START” on
the display. Transposing the entire rhythm
This screen lets you specify the measure to be used as song
copy source start point.
You can transpose the bass sequence of the rhythm song
up or down in semitone units.
COPY
START 1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
1- 1- 0 PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit.
Copy source start point The rhythm song selection screen appears.

ZOOM MRS-8 85
MRS-8(E).book 86 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to

transpose.
Copying a rhythm song
You can copy the contents of any rhythm song in a project
3. Press the [EDIT] key. to any other rhythm song number. This is useful to create
The rhythm song edit menu appears. variations of a song.

SongEdit NOTE
TRANSPOS When you execute the copy, the contents of the destination
rhythm song will be erased. Use this function with care.

4. Verify that the indication “TRANSPOS” is on

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit.
The display changes as follows.
The rhythm song selection screen appears.

TRANSPOS 2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to

0 copy.
This song will be used as copy source.
Transpose value

3. Press the [FUNCTION] key twice.

5. Turn the dial to select the transpose setting The display changes as follows.
(-6 – 0 +6), and press the [ENTER] key.
The default setting is 0 (no transposing). When you select
a setting such as +5, the bass sequence will be transposed COPY
five semitones (a perfect fourth) up. (Depending on the 00å 1E
range, the result may be one octave higher or lower.) Copy destination rhythm song
When you press the [ENTER] key to confirm the Copy source rhythm song
transpose setting, the indication “TRANSPOS SURE?”
appears on the display.
4. Turn the dial to select the number of the
6. To carry out the transpose operation, press copy destination rhythm song, and press
the [ENTER] key once more. the [ENTER] key.
The transpose operation is carried out, and the rhythm When you select an empty rhythm song number, the
song edit menu appears again. indication “E” is shown to the right of the number.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, When you press the [ENTER] key, the indication “COPY
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a SURE?” appears on the display.
time.
5. To carry out the copy operation, press the
[ENTER] key once more.
NOTE
When you carry out the transpose operation, the root of the
When the copy operation is completed, the unit returns to
chord information for the rhythm song is rewritten. To return the rhythm song selection screen with the destination
to the original condition, perform transpose once more in the rhythm song being loaded.
opposite direction. By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
7. To return to the main screen, press the time.
[EXIT] key repeatedly.
6. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly.

86 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 87 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Erasing the rhythm song Assigning a name to a rhythm

This section explains how to erase the entire rhythm song,
song
resetting it to a blank state. When a rhythm song is created, the song name “Songxxx”
(where xxx is the song number) is automatically assigned.
You can edit this name as necessary.
NOTE
Once you erase the rhythm song, it cannot be recovered.
Use this function with care. 1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit.
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ The rhythm song selection screen appears.
PATTERN] key repeatedly, until the key is lit.
The rhythm song selection screen appears. 2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm song
whose name you want to edit.
2. Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to
erase. 3. Press the [EDIT] key.
The rhythm song edit menu appears.
3. Press the [FUNCTION] key.
The display changes as follows.
SongEdit
TRANSPOS
DELETE
SURE? 4. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
the indication “SongEdit NAME” on the
4. To carry out the erase operation, press the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
[ENTER] key. The display changes as follows.
When the erase operation is completed, the unit returns to
the rhythm song selection screen.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
SongName
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
SONG000
time.
5. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
5. To return to the main screen, press the flashing position to the character to
[EXIT] key repeatedly. change, and turn the dial or use the rhythm
section pads and keys to select a
character.
For information on how to input characters, refer to page
33.

6. When the name has been input, press the

[EXIT] key.
The rhythm song name is changed, and the display
returns to the rhythm song edit menu.

7. To return to the main screen, press the

[EXIT] key repeatedly.

ZOOM MRS-8 87
MRS-8(E).book 88 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

Importing rhythm patterns

and rhythm songs from IMPORT
BontLkBl 0
another project Project name Project number

This section explains how to import all rhythm pattern 5. Turn the dial to select the source project,
and rhythm song data or only a specific rhythm pattern and press the [ENTER] key.
from another project that was saved on the SD card. The subsequent steps differ, depending on which
selection was made in step 4.

NOTE • When ALL was selected

The import process will overwrite existing rhythm patterns/
Verify that the indication “IMPORT SURE?” is shown on
rhythm songs in the currently selected project. Take care not
the display. Then proceed to step 6.
to accidentally overwrite rhythm pattern or rhythm song data
that you want to keep.
• When PATTERN was selected
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ The source rhythm pattern is shown on the display. Turn
PATTERN] key to bring up the rhythm the dial to select the desired rhythm pattern, and press the
pattern or rhythm song selection screen. [ENTER] key. The import destination pattern then is
displayed. Use the dial again to select the destination
Importing of rhythm patterns or rhythm songs is possible
pattern, and press the [ENTER] key. The indication
both in rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song mode.
“IMPORT SURE?” appears on the display.
2. Press the [SYSTEM/UTILITY] key.
The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm
6. To carry out the import process, press the
[ENTER] key.
section settings appears.
When all patterns/songs were selected, the rhythm
pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears again.
UTILITY When a specific rhythm pattern was selected, the unit
DRUM KIT returns to the condition of step 5. To return to the main
screen, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
the indication “UTILITY IMPORT” on the
time.
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows.

IMPORT
ALL
4. Use the cursor left/right keys to select ALL
(import all rhythm patterns and rhythm
songs) or PATTERN (import specific rhythm
pattern), and press the [ENTER] key.
In this condition, you can select the source project from
which to import.

88 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 89 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

• PAD SENS
Editing various settings of Change the pad sensitivity which determines the volume
level in relation to the force with which the pad is struck.
the rhythm section
• MIDI
This section explains how to edit various settings that Make MIDI-related settings (→ p. 108).
affect the entire rhythm section, such as adjusting the pad
sensitivity or adjusting the volume of the metronome. • IMPORT
Import rhythm patterns and rhythm songs from another
project saved on the SD card (→ p. 88).
Basic procedure
• MEMORY
The basic procedure for editing the rhythm section Check the remaining amount of rhythm pattern and
settings is the same for most items, as described below. rhythm song memory.

HINT • POSITION
This procedure can be carried out either in rhythm pattern Select whether the drum track panning operates as seen
mode or rhythm song mode. from the drummer or from the listener (audience).

1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/ 4. Turn the dial to edit the setting.
PATTERN] key to bring up the rhythm The screen display and operation will be different for
pattern or rhythm song selection screen. each item. For details on most items, refer to the sections
that follow. For information on rhythm pattern/rhythm
2. Press the [SYSTEM/UTILITY] key. song import and MIDI settings, refer to the respective
The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm sections in this manual.
section settings appears.
5. When you have finished making settings,
press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to return to
UTILITY the main screen.
DRUM KIT
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to select one
Changing the length of the
of the following items to edit, and press the pre-count
[ENTER] key.
You can change the length of the pre-count that is heard
when you record a rhythm pattern in real time. Perform
• DRUM KIT
steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the indication
Select the drum kit to use for rhythm pattern/rhythm song
“UTILITY COUNT”, and press the [ENTER] key. Then
play (→ p. 64).
turn the dial to choose one of these settings.
• BASS PRG
Select the bass program to use for rhythm pattern/rhythm
song play (→ p. 64).
COUNT
4
• COUNT
Change the length of the pre-count that is heard during • OFF
real-time input of a rhythm pattern. The pre-count is turned off.

• ClickVol • 1–8
Change the volume level of the metronome click that is A pre-count of 1 – 8 beats is heard (default: 4).
heard during real-time input of a rhythm pattern.

ZOOM MRS-8 89
MRS-8(E).book 90 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Rhythm]

• SPECIAL • LITE
A special pre-count as shown below is heard. Maximum sensitivity. Even light taps will produce a loud
volume.

• NORMAL
Normal sensitivity (default setting).

• HARD
Changing the metronome Low sensitivity. Strong tapping is needed to produce a
loud volume.
volume
You can change the volume of the metronome that is • EX HARD
heard when you record a rhythm pattern in real time. Lowest sensitivity. Very strong tapping is needed to
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the produce a loud volume.
indication “UTILITY ClickVol”, and press the [ENTER]
key. Then turn the dial to set the volume (0 – 15).
Checking the remaining
ClickVol amount of memory
15
To check the remaining amount of recording memory for
rhythm patterns and rhythm songs, perform steps 1 – 3 of
HINT “Basic procedure” to bring up the indication “UTILITY
A setting of zero means that the metronome click is off. MEMORY”, and press the [ENTER] key.
This screen is for display only. There is no setting that can
be edited.

Adjusting the sensitivity of

the pads MEMORY
32%
You can specify the volume that is produced according to
the force with which you hit the pads (pad sensitivity).
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the
indication “UTILITY PAD SENS”, and press the Swapping the left/right pan
[ENTER] key. Then turn the dial to choose one of these position
settings.
The pan setting for the drum sound can be set to apply as
seen from the drummer or from the listener.
PAD SENS Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the
NORMAL indication “UTILITY POSITION”, and press the
[ENTER] key. Then select one of the following settings.
• SOFT
The volume will be soft, regardless of how strongly you • PLAYER
tap the pad. Left/right pan setting applies as seen from the player
(drummer).
• MEDIUM
The volume will be medium, regardless of how strongly • LISTENER
you tap the pad. Left/right pan setting applies as seen from the listener
(audience).
• LOUD
The volume will be loud, regardless of how strongly you
tap the pad.

90 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 91 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]
This section explains the functions and operation of the effect section built into the MRS-8.

result will be recorded when you carry out recording.

About the effects When the insert effect is applied to one of the audio tracks
(tracks 1 – 8) or the drum track/bass track (drum kit/bass
program output signal), the effect processes only a
The MRS-8 has two types of effects, an “insert effect” specific track. This can be used to modify the sound of a
that is inserted at a specific position, and a “send/return recorded track.
effect” that is used via the built-in mixer. The two effect By selecting the position immediately before the
types can be used simultaneously. The characteristics of [MASTER] fader, you can process the final stereo mix,
these effects are described below. for example to adjust the tonal quality or sonic intensity
during mixdown or bounce recording.
■ Insert effect
The insert effect is placed into the signal path at a specific ■ Send/return effect
point. You can select one of the following positions at The send/return effect is internally connected to the send/
which to apply the effect. return loop of the mixer section. This applies to all tracks
and can be used to add effects such as reverb or chorus
(1) Immediately after the input jack during mixdown or bounce recording.
(2) In the output of any audio track or drum The signal level of each track going to the send/return
track/bass track effect (send level) can be adjusted individually. The
(3) Immediately before the [MASTER] fader output of the send/return effect is returned to the internal
mixer and added to the stereo mix.
When the position immediately after the input jack is
selected, the effect processes the input signal, and the

Insert effect
Recorder (2)
Track 1
Track 2
(1) Track 3
Input Track 4
Track 5/6
Track 7/8 MASTER OUTPUT

Drum

Bass

Rhythm section DRUM BASS 1 2 3 4 5/6 7/8 MASTER

(3)
Internal mixer

ZOOM MRS-8 91
MRS-8(E).book 92 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

Send level adjustment

Send SEND LEVEL
Send/return effect
Return DRUM BASS 1 2 7/8 MASTER

Using the insert effect • MIC

An algorithm suitable for microphone recording of vocals
and acoustic instruments.
This section explains how to select the position for the
insert effect, how to select a patch, and how to edit • LINE
patches. An algorithm suitable for recording line-level output
instruments such as a synthesizer.
About insert effect patches
• DUAL MIC
An algorithm with two entirely separate channels for
The insert effect section contains a number of single
mono input x 2 and mono output x 2.
effects such as compressor, distortion, and delay. Each of
these separate effects is called an “effect module”.
• MASTERING (Display: MASTRING)
In the insert effect, the effect modules are connected in
An algorithm suitable for processing the final stereo mix
series. A combination of effect modules that can be used
signal.
simultaneously is called an “algorithm”.
Depending on the selected algorithm, the input/output
configuration of the effect will differ. The arrangement of
The MRS-8 allows the following algorithms.
effect modules for each algorithm and the input/output
signal flow are shown in the diagram below.
• CLEAN
• DIST
• ACO/BASS SIM (Display: Ac/BsSIM) HINT
• BASS For some insert position settings, a stereo signal may be
An algorithm suitable for recording guitar/bass. mixed to mono before effect input (→ p. 94).

Algorithm Effect module arrangement Input/output type

CLEAN
DIST COMP PRE AMP/DRIVE ZNR EQ MODULATION/DELAY
ACO/BASS SIM
BASS Mono → Stereo

MIC COMP/LIM MIC PRE+DE-ESSER ZNR EQ MODULATION/DELAY

LINE COMP/LIM ISOLATOR ZNR EQ MODULATION Stereo → Stereo

COMP/LIM MIC PRE ZNR EQ DOUBLING

DUAL MIC
Mono x 2 → Mono x 2
COMP/LIM MIC PRE ZNR EQ DOUBLING

3BAND COMP DIMENSION

MASTERING NORMALIZE ZNR EQ Stereo → Stereo
LO-FI RESONANCE

92 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 93 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

Each effect module in an algorithm comprises two • IN

aspects, namely the effect type and the effect parameters. Immediately after input (default)
Even within the same algorithm, changing the effect type
and/or the effect parameters can produce a variety of • DRUM
different sounds. Drum track

• BASS
Patch
Bass track
PRE AMP/
COMP ZNR
DRIVE
• TR 1 – 4
MODULATION/ Tracks 1 – 4
EQ PAT LVL
DELAY
• TR 1/2, TR 3/4, TR 5/6, TR 7/8
Mono tracks x 2 (tracks 1/2, 3/4) or stereo tracks (tracks
The edited effect type and parameter settings are stored as 5/6, 7/8)
a so-called “patch”. The insert effect allows 20 – 50
patches per algorithm. The numbers are listed in the table • MASTER
below. Immediately before [MASTER] fader

Algorithm
Number of patches 2. Turn the dial to select the insert position.
(preprogrammed patches)
CLEAN 30 (22)
DIST 50 (42) HINT
ACO/BASS SIM 20 (10) While the screen of step 1 is shown, the status keys and
BASS 20 (10) INPUT [ON/OFF] keys 1/2 can also be used to select the
MIC 50 (31) insert position. To select the track pairs 1/2 and 3/4, press
LINE 50 (30) both status keys together. To select the drum/bass track
DUAL MIC 50 (30) using the status key method, press the [RHYTHM] status key
MASTERING 30 (21) repeatedly until the desired insert position (“DRUM” or
“BASS”) is shown.
To use a patch, first select the algorithm and then select
one of the patches in the algorithm. When you select a 3. When the desired insert position has been
patch, it becomes effective immediately. selected, press the [EXIT] key to return to
the main screen.

Changing the insert location

of the insert effect Selecting the patch for the
insert effect
In the default condition of a project, the insert effect is
applied immediately after the input. To change the insert This section explains how to select the patch for the insert
location, proceed as follows. effect.

1. From the main screen, press the [INPUT 1. From the main screen, press the [INSERT
SRC] key in the effect section. EFFECT] key in the effect section
The current insert position is shown on the display. repeatedly, until the key is lit.
The following display is shown. In this condition, you
can select the algorithm and patch for the insert effect.
IN SRC
IN
Insert position

The display meaning is as follows.

ZOOM MRS-8 93
MRS-8(E).book 94 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

• Insert position immediately after input

Algorithm name
Recording on a mono track
CLEAN L
Standard 0 EFFECT
Input 1 (M→S) Track
Patch name Patch number
R
L
2. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the Input 1
EFFECT
(DUAL)
Track
algorithm to use. R
When you select the algorithm, the patch currently L
Input 1 EFFECT
selected for that algorithm becomes active. Track
(S→S)
Input 2
R
3. Turn the dial to select the patch to use. L
The new patch is called up immediately. EFFECT
Input 1 (S→S) Track
R
L
HINT Input 1 EFFECT
• You can also use the cursor left/right keys to adjust the patch (M→S) Track
Input 2
level (the final volume of the patch). R
• If the indication “EMPTY” is shown in the patch name field, L
Input 1 EFFECT
selecting the patch will have no effect. Track
(DUAL)
Input 2
R
4. To temporarily turn off the insert effect,
press the [INSERT EFFECT] key so that the
key goes out. Recording on a stereo track
The insert effect is switched to the bypass (off) condition. L Odd-
EFFECT numbered track
The indications “BYPASS” and “TUNER→ENTER” are Input 1 (M→S) Even-
shown alternately on the display. R numbered track
To turn the insert effect on again, press the [INSERT
L Odd-
EFFECT] key once more. EFFECT numbered track
Input 1 (DUAL) Even-
R numbered track
HINT
L Odd-
Pressing the [ENTER] key in the bypass condition activates Input 1 EFFECT numbered track
the tuner function (→ p.114). (S→S)
Even-
Input 2 numbered track
R
5. Press the [EXIT] key to return to the main L Odd-
EFFECT numbered track
screen. Input 1 (S→S) Even-
The flow of the signal before and after the insert effect R numbered track
will change, depending on the insert position and the
L Odd-
number of input/output channels (mono/stereo). Input 1 numbered track
EFFECT
The illustration at right shows how the signal changes (M→S) Even-
Input 2 R numbered track
before and after the insert effect, depending on the insert
effect position. (In the effect indication, “M→S” stands L Odd-
Input 1 numbered track
for mono input/stereo output, “S→S” stands for stereo EFFECT
(DUAL) Even-
input and output, and “Dual” stands for mono input x 2 Input 2
R numbered track
and mono output x 2.)

94 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 95 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

• Insert position at output of audio track or • Insert position immediately before [MASTER]
drum kit/bass program fader

Insert target is mono track (1 - 4) or MASTER fader MASTER

MASTER
bass track OUTPUT

Recorder Internal mixer L L

L EFFECT
Track EFFECT Fader R (M→S)
(M→S) R
R
L
Track EFFECT MASTER fader
(S→S) Fader MASTER
MASTER
OUTPUT
R
L L EFFECT L
EFFECT (S→S)
Track (DUAL) Fader R R
R

MASTER fader MASTER

MASTER
Insert target is stereo track (5/6, 7/8), OUTPUT
mono track pair (1/2, 3/4) or drum track
L L
EFFECT
Recorder Internal mixer R (DUAL)
R
Odd- L Fader
numbered track EFFECT
Even- (M→S)
numbered track
Fader
R

L
Odd-
numbered track EFFECT
Fader Editing an insert effect patch
(S→S)
Even- Fader
numbered track R The effect modules of an algorithm have various effect
parameters that can be adjusted to make detailed changes
Odd- L Fader to the character of the effect. By editing the effect
numbered track EFFECT
(DUAL) parameters, you can obtain the desired sonic result.
Even- Fader
numbered track R For some effect modules, you can also change the effect
type. For example, the MODULATION/DELAY effect
module of the MIC algorithm provides 19 effect types
such as chorus, flanger, phaser, etc. (When you change
the effect type, the effect parameter arrangement also
changes.)

Effect MODULATION/
module DELAY

Effect CHORUS FLANGER PHASER

type
Effect DEPTH DEPTH RATE
parameters RATE RATE COLOR
MIX FB

This section explains how to edit the effect type and effect
parameters for the currently selected patch.

ZOOM MRS-8 95
MRS-8(E).book 96 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

NOTE
The algorithm itself (type and arrangement of effect modules) Effect module
cannot be edited.
COMPRESS
1. From the main screen, press the [INSERT SENS 4
EFFECT] key in the effect section
repeatedly, until the key is lit.
4. Use the cursor left/right keys to select the
The insert effect patch selection screen is shown. effect module to edit.

CLEAN MOD/DLY
Standard 0
CHORUS
2. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the
Depending on the selected effect module, the indication
algorithm which has the patch you want to
on the first line of the display changes as shown in the
edit. Turn the dial to select the patch.
table below.
This table shows the display that is shown when the effect
HINT module is on. If the effect module is off, the first line of
If the indication “EMPTY” is shown in the patch name field, the display shows the module name or the effect type, and
all of the modules are set to off. By editing such a patch, you the second line shows “-OFF-”.
can create it from scratch.

HINT
3. Press the [EDIT] key.
In the DUAL MIC algorithm, the modules assigned to the L
The indication “EDIT” appears on the display. This and R channels can be edited separately. The indication “L”
means that the patch can now be edited. on the display means that the module for the left channel is
The first line of the display shows the effect module selected. The indication “R” means that the module for the
currently selected for editing. right channel is selected.

5. To change the effect type of the currently

selected effect module, turn the dial.

Algorithm Module/display indication

CLEAN
DIST COMPRESS PRE/DRV 3BandEQ MOD/DLY TOTAL
ACO/BASS SIM
BASS COMP PRE AMP/DRIVE EQ MODULATION/DELAY ZNR, PAT LVL

MIC
COMP/LIM MIC PRE 3BandEQ MOD/DLY TOTAL
COMP/LIM MICPRE+DE-ESSER EQ MODULATION/DELAY ZNR, PAT LVL

LINE
COMP/LIM ISOLATOR 3BandEQ MOD/DLY TOTAL
COMP/LIM ISOLATOR EQ MODULATION/DELAY ZNR, PAT LVL

DUAL MIC
COMP L MicPre L EQ L DOUBLE L TOTAL
COMP/LIM MICPRE EQ DOUBLING ZNR, PAT LVL

CMP/LoFi NORMLZR 3BandEQ DIM/RESO TOTAL

MASTERING
3BAND COMP/ NORMALIZER EQ DIMENSION/ ZNR, PAT LVL
Lo-Fi RESONANCE

96 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 97 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

For effect modules which comprise multiple effect types, module on again.
the name of the currently selected effect type is shown on
the second line of the display. When you turn the dial in
this condition, the effect type changes. FLANGER
-OFF-

NOTE
MOD/DLY The modules included in TOTAL cannot be turned off.
FLANGER
Effect type name 9. To compare the sound of the currently
edited patch before and after editing, press
the [INSERT EFFECT] key.
HINT Pressing the [INSERT EFFECT] key during editing
• If the contents of a patch have been changed, the “EDIT” activates the compare function. While the compare
indicator in the upper part of the display will change to function is active, the display changes as follows and the
“EDITED”. When the setting is returned to the original patch reverts to the last stored condition.
condition, the indicator reverts to “EDIT”.
• To edit the ZNR module, bring up the indication “TOTAL” on
the first line of the display, and then press the cursor down key COMPARE
to call up the parameter. Standard 0

6. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the

To return to the edited patch, press the [INSERT
effect parameter to edit.
EFFECT] key once more, or press the [EXIT] key.
The displayed parameter will be different, depending on
the effect module and effect type.
The following illustration shows what appears on the
10. Repeat steps 4 – 8 as necessary to edit
other modules.
display when you have selected the DEPTH parameter of
the “FLANGER” effect.
11. To adjust the patch level (the final volume of
the patch), use the cursor left/right keys to
FLANGER bring up the indication “TOTAL PAT LVL” on
DEPTH 2 the display, and turn the dial.
Effect parameter Setting value The patch level can be adjusted in the range from 1 to 30.

HINT TOTAL
PAT LVL 23
When the first line of the display shows “TOTAL”, the cursor
up/down keys can be used to select the ZNR module and the
patch level. 12. When you have finished editing, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly to return to the main
7. Turn the dial to change the setting value. screen.
For details on the effect types that can be selected for each
effect module and on the effect parameters of each type,
refer to the information in the appendix of this manual. NOTE
Keep in mind that if you select another patch without first
storing the edited patch, the changes will be lost. For
8. To toggle the effect module on or off, bring
information on how to store a patch, refer to the next section.
up an effect type or parameter for the
module, and then press the [ENTER] key.
The effect module is turned off. The module name or the
effect type is shown on the first line and the indication
“-OFF-” on the second line of the display. Pressing the
[ENTER] key once more in this condition turns the

ZOOM MRS-8 97
MRS-8(E).book 98 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

Storing or swapping insert Assigning a name to an insert

effect patches effect patch
An insert effect patch that you have edited can be stored This section explains how to assign a name to the
in any location of the same algorithm. By storing an currently selected insert effect patch.
existing patch in another location, you can create a copy
of that patch. Interchanging the position of patches 1. From the insert effect patch selection
(swapping) is also possible. screen, select the patch whose name you
want to change.
1. From the insert effect patch selection
screen or the edit screen, press the
[FUNCTION] key. CLEAN
Standard 0
The currently selected patch goes into store standby
mode. In this condition, you can select whether to
perform store or swap. 2. Press the [EDIT] key.
The selected patch can now be edited.

STORE TO 3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up

Standard 0
the indication “TOTAL PAT LVL” on the
Patch number
display.

2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up

the indication “STORE TO” or “SWAP TO”. TOTAL
PAT LVL 25

3. Turn the dial to select the number of the

patch to store/swap. 4. Repeatedly press the cursor down key to
When carrying out store, the current patch settings will be bring up the indication “PAT NAME” on the
stored under this number. display.
When carrying out swap, the currently selected patch and The name of the selected patch can now be edited. The
the patch settings selected here will be interchanged. cursor indicates the character that can be changed.

4. To carry out the store/swap operation,

press the [FUNCTION] key. PAT NAME
When the store/swap operation is completed, the insert
±tandard
tandard
effect patch selection screen appears again. Cursor
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [FUNCTION]
key, you can cancel the operation and back up one step at 5. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
a time. cursor to the character you want to change,
and turn the dial or use the rhythm section
pads and keys to select a character.
HINT
• Patches are saved as part of a project.
For information on how to input characters, refer to page
• Patches from another project can be imported to the current 33.
project (→ p. 102).
6. To confirm the new name, press the
[FUNCTION] key in the control section
twice.
The patch is stored, overwriting the old information.
When storing is complete, the insert effect patch selection
screen appears again.

98 ZOOM MRS-8
MRS-8(E).book 99 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

NOTE
Keep in mind that the name will revert to the previous name Fader 1 MASTER
1 MASTER
OUTPUT
if you switch to another patch without storing the edited jacks
patch. Insert
effect Track 1

Applying the insert effect only [MASTER] fader

to the monitor signal
Normally, when the insert effect is applied immediately • DRY
after the input, the signal processed by the effect will be Only the unprocessed input signal will be recorded on the
recorded (effect recording). If necessary, however, you track. If the insert effect is applied to the input, the signal
can apply the insert effect only to the monitor signal, and appearing at the MASTER OUTPUT jacks will be
record the unprocessed input signal on the track. processed by the effect.
For example when recording the unprocessed sound of a
vocal performance, the vocalist may be more comfortable
Fader 1 MASTER
singing if an effect is applied to the monitor signal only. 1 MASTER
OUTPUT
jacks
1. Set the insert effect position to immediately
Insert
effect
after the input.
Track 1 [MASTER] fader
2. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
UTILITY] key in the display section.
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the 4. Turn the dial to change the setting to
display. “DRY”.

SYSTEM 5. When you have finished making settings,

PROJECT press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to return to
the main screen.

3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up

the indication “SYSTEM REC SRC” on the NOTE
display, and press the [ENTER] key. This setting is stored for each project. If required, change the
setting back to “WET” before you begin recording other
The display changes as follows.
parts.

REC SRC
WET
You can now select one of the following two signal types
to be recorded on the track.

• WET
The input signal that has passed through the insert effect
will be recorded on the track (default setting).

ZOOM MRS-8 99
MRS-8(E).book 100 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

3. To temporarily turn off the send/return

Using the send/return effect, press the [SEND/RETURN] key so
that the key goes out.
effect
The send/return effect is switched to the bypass (off)
condition. The indication “SEND -MUTE-” is shown on
This section explains how to select and edit patches for the display. To turn the send/return effect on again, press
the send/return effect. the [SEND/RETURN] key once more.

4. Press the [EXIT] key to return to the main

About the send/return effect screen.
patches
The send/return effect of the MRS-8 is a single effect Editing a send/return effect
module for which one effect type (reverb, chorus, delay, patch
etc.) can be selected.
Each effect type has various effect parameters which can This section explains how to edit a send/return effect
be adjusted to control the sound produced by the effect. patch.
Such settings can be assigned a name and stored as a
patch. In the default condition, a project has 60 send/ 1. From the main screen, press the [SEND/
return effect patches (40 of which are preprogrammed). RETURN] key in the effect section
By selecting one of these, the send/return effect can be repeatedly, until the key is lit.
instantly switched. The send/return effect patch selection screen appears.

Selecting a send/return effect SEND

patch VoChorus 0

This section explains how to select a send/return effect

2. Turn the dial to select the patch to edit.
patch.

1. From the main screen, press the [SEND/ HINT

RETURN] key in the effect section If the indication “EMPTY” is shown in the patch name field,
repeatedly, until the key is lit. all of the modules are set to off. By editing such a patch, you
The send/return effect patch selection screen appears. can create it from scratch.

3. Press the [EDIT] key.

SEND The currently selected effect type appears on the second
VoChorus 0
line of the display.
Patch name Patch number

2. Turn the dial to select the patch.

TYPE
HALL
As you turn the dial, new patches will be recalled Effect type
immediately. If the send/return effect send level for each
track has been raised, you can press the PLAY [R] key to
play back the song and check out the result of the newly The indication “EDIT” is shown on the display during
selected patch. patch editing.

HINT
• You can also use the cursor left/right keys to adjust the EFX
LVL parameter (the mix amount of the effect sound).
• For information on how to adjust the send level, see page 59.

100 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 101 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

4. Turn the dial to switch the effect type. 8. Repeat steps 5 – 6 as necessary to edit
When the effect type is changed, the effect parameters other effect parameters.
will also change accordingly.
9. When you have finished editing, press the
[EXIT] key.
HINT
The send/return effect patch selection screen appears
• If the contents of a patch have been changed, the “EDIT”
indicator in the upper part of the display will change to
again.
“EDITED”. When the setting is returned to the original
condition, the indicator reverts to “EDIT”.
NOTE
• By pressing the [ENTER] key during editing, you can
Keep in mind that if you select another patch without first
temporarily turn the effect off, which is convenient during
storing the edited patch, the changes will be lost. For
parameter adjustment. To turn the effect back on, press the
information on how to store a patch, refer to the next section.
[ENTER] key once more.

5. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the Storing or swapping send/
effect parameter to edit. return effect patches
The first line of the display shows the effect type, and the
second line shows the name and current value of the A patch that you have edited can be stored in any location
effect parameter. of the send/return effect. By storing an existing patch in
another location, you can create a copy of that patch.
Interchanging the position of patches (swapping) is also
HALL possible.
PRE DLY 5

Effect parameter Setting value

1. From the send/return effect patch selection
screen or edit screen, press the
[FUNCTION] key.
HINT
The currently selected patch goes into store standby
To change the effect type, press the cursor up key repeatedly
to bring up the indication of step 3, and then turn the dial.
mode. In this condition, you can select whether to
perform store or swap.
6. Turn the dial to change the setting.
For details on the effect types and effect parameters for
STORE TO
the send/return effect, refer to the appendix at the end of VoChorus 0
this manual.
Patch number

7. To compare the sound of the currently

edited patch before and after editing, press 2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
the [SEND/RETURN] key. the indication “STORE TO” or “SWAP TO”.
Pressing the [SEND/RETURN] key during editing
activates the compare function. 3. Turn the dial to select the number of the
While the compare function is active, the display changes patch to store/swap.
as follows and the patch reverts to the last stored When carrying out store, the current patch settings will be
condition. stored under this number.
When carrying out swap, the currently selected patch and
the patch settings selected here will be interchanged.
COMPARE
VoChorus 0

To return to the edited patch, press the [SEND/RETURN]

key once more, or press the [EXIT] key.

ZOOM MRS-8 101

MRS-8(E).book 102 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

4. To carry out the store/swap operation, 5. To confirm the new name, press the
press the [FUNCTION] key. [FUNCTION] key in the control section
When the store/swap operation is completed, the send/ twice.
return effect patch selection screen appears again. The patch is stored, overwriting the old information.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [FUNCTION] When storing is complete, the send/return effect patch
key, you can cancel the operation and back up one step at selection screen appears again.
a time.

NOTE
HINT Keep in mind that the name will revert to the previous name
• Patches are saved as part of a project. if you switch to another patch without storing the edited
• Patches from another project can be imported to the current patch.
project.

Assigning a name to a send/

return effect patch Importing patches from
another project
This section explains how to assign a name to the
currently selected send/return effect patch.
If required, you can import all patches or specific patches
1. From the send/return effect patch selection of the insert effect or send/return effect from another
screen, select the patch whose name you project.
want to change.
NOTE
Keep in mind that importing patches in this way will overwrite
SEND patches in the current project. Take care not to accidentally
VoChorus 0
erase patches that you wish to keep.

2. Press the [EDIT] key. 1. To import a specific patch, select the patch
The selected patch can now be edited. to use as import target.

3. Repeatedly press the cursor down key to • Importing a specific insert effect patch
bring up the indication “PAT NAME” on the From the main screen, press the [INSERT EFFECT] key
display. to bring up the insert effect patch selection screen. Then
The name of the selected patch can now be edited. The use the cursor up/down keys and the dial to select the
cursor indicates the character that can be changed. algorithm and patch to use as import target. The import
source can be selected from the patches of the same
algorithm.
PAT NAME
±oChorus
oChorus • Importing a specific send/return effect patch
Cursor From the main screen, press the [SEND/RETURN
EFFECT] key to bring up the send/return effect patch
selection screen. Then use the dial to select the patch to
4. Use the cursor left/right keys to move the
use as import target.
cursor to the character you want to change,
and turn the dial or use the rhythm section
pads and keys to select a character.
2. Press the [SYSTEM/UTILITY] key to bring
up the indication “UTILITY IMPORT” on the
For information on how to input characters, refer to page
display, and then press the [ENTER] key.
33.
The display changes as follows.

102 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 103 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Effects]

IMPORT
ALL
3. Turn the dial to select ALL (import all
patches) or PATCH (import single patch),
and press the [ENTER] key.
In this condition, you can select the project from which to
import.

IMPORT
PRJ005 5

Project name Project number

4. Turn the dial to select the import source

project, and press the [ENTER] key.
The subsequent steps differ, depending on which
selection was made in step 3.

• When ALL was selected

Verify that the indication “IMPORT SURE?” is shown on
the display and proceed to step 5.

• When PATCH was selected

The import source patch appears on the display. When
you turn the dial to select the patch and press the
[ENTER] key, the import target patch selected in step 1 is
shown. If necessary, turn the dial to select the number of
the patch to use as import target, and press the [ENTER]
key. The indication “SURE?” appears on the display.

5. To carry out the import process, press the

[ENTER] key.
All patches or the specified patch of the selected project
will be imported. When the process is completed, the
display of step 1 appears again.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
time.

ZOOM MRS-8 103

MRS-8(E).book 104 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Projects]
This section describes how to perform operations for entire projects.

About projects Working with projects

On the MRS-8, the data needed to reproduce a song you This section explains how to perform operations such as
create are managed in units called “projects”. By loading loading or saving a project.
a project, you can always go back to exactly the same
condition that existed when the project was saved.
A project contains the following information. Basic procedure
Some steps are the same for all project operations. These
• Audio data recorded on V-takes 1 – 10 of tracks
are explained below.
1 – 8 and the master track
• V-take selected for each track 1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
• Internal mixer settings UTILITY] key in the display section.
The display changes as follows.
• Track parameter settings
• Numbers and settings of patches currently selected
for insert effect/send return effects SYSTEM
• Rhythm patterns
PROJECT
• Rhythm songs
2. Verify that “SYSTEM PROJECT” is shown
• Drum kit/bass program currently selected for drum/ on the display, and press the [ENTER] key.
bass track The project menu appears on the display, allowing you to
• Other settings select the desired project operation.

HINT PROJECT
On the MRS-8, recording/playback operations can be SELECT
performed only for the currently loaded project. It is not
possible to perform functions for multiple projects
simultaneously. HINT
Each time you call up the project menu, the current project is
automatically saved.

3. Use the cursor left/right keys to select one

of the following operations.

• PROJECT SELECT
Load a previously saved project from the SD card.

• PROJECT NEW
Create a new project.

• PROJECT COPY
Duplicate a project saved on the SD card.

• PROJECT ERASE
Erase a project from the SD card.

104 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 105 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Projects]

• PROJECT NAME screen. By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the

Edit the name of the currently loaded project. [ENTER] key, you can cancel the operation and back up
one step at a time.
• PROJECT PROTECT
Switch the protection status of the currently loaded
project on or off. Creating a new project
This operation creates a new project on the SD card.
• PROJECT SEQ PLAY
Continuously play the master tracks from several projects
saved on the SD card (sequence play).
1. Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to
bring up the indication “PROJECT NEW” on
the display. Then press the [ENTER] key.
HINT The name and number of the project to create are shown
For details on the sequence play function, see page 111. on the display.

4. Press the [ENTER] key to execute the

Project number
operation (or change the setting) that you
selected. PRJNo001
For details on the procedure, refer to the sections that PRJ001
follow. Project name

5. To return to the main screen, press the

The number of the newly created project is assigned
[EXIT] key repeatedly.
automatically, choosing the lowest free project number,
Depending on which selection was made in step 3, the and a default name of “PRJxxx” (where xxx is the project
main screen may return automatically. number) will be assigned.
The project name is shown with a cursor on the first
character. This indicates that you can change the project
Loading a project
name.
You can select a project that was saved on the SD card,
and load it. 2. If necessary, edit the project name.
To edit the name, use the cursor left/right keys and the
dial or the pads and keys in the rhythm section to input a
HINT character. For details on entering characters, see page 33.
When power to the MRS-8 is turned on, the project that was
last worked on will be loaded automatically.
3. To create the project, press the [ENTER]
key.
1. Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to
The newly created project is loaded automatically, and
bring up the indication “PROJECT
the unit returns to the main screen.
SELECT” on the display. Then press the
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
[ENTER] key.
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
The name and number of the project to be loaded are
time.
shown on the display.

HINT
PRJ SEL • The project name can also be edited later ( → p. 107).
PRJ000 0 • If the recorder is stopped and the main screen is shown, you
Project name Project number can call up the screen of step 1 simply by pressing the [NEW
PROJECT] key.

2. Turn the dial to select the desired project.

3. Press the [ENTER] key to load the project.

When loading is completed, the unit returns to the main

ZOOM MRS-8 105

MRS-8(E).book 106 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Projects]

Copying a project Erasing a project

This operation duplicates a project that is saved on the SD This operation erases a saved project from the SD card.
card.

NOTE
1. Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to
Once a project has been erased, it cannot be restored. Use
bring up the indication “PROJECT COPY”
this operation with care.
on the display. Then press the [ENTER] key.
The name and number of the project to copy are shown 1. Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to
on the display. bring up the indication “PROJECT ERASE”
on the display. Then press the [ENTER] key.
PRJ COPY The display changes as follows.
PRJ000 0

Project name Project number

PRJ ERS
PRJ002 2
2. Turn the dial to select the copy source Project name Project number
project, and press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows.
2. Turn the dial to select the project, and press
the [ENTER] key.
PRJ COPY The indication “SURE?” appears on the display.
COPY TO 1

Copy destination project number

3. Press the [ENTER] key to erase the project.
You can also erase the project that is currently loaded. If
you do this, the lowest-numbered project on the SD card
From this screen, you can select the copy destination
will automatically be loaded after the erase operation has
project number.
been completed.

3. Turn the dial to select the copy destination

project number, and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE
The indication “SURE?” appears on the display. A project for which protect is ON cannot be erased. Set
protect to OFF and then repeat the procedure (→ p. 107).

4. Press the [ENTER] key to copy the project.

When copying is completed, the copy destination project
is loaded, and the unit returns to the main screen.
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key,
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a
time.

106 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 107 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Projects]

1. Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to

Changing the project name bring up the indication “PROJECT
This operation lets you edit the name of the currently PROTECT” on the display. Then press the
loaded project. [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows.
1. Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to
bring up the indication “PROJECT NAME”
on the display. Then press the [ENTER] key.
PRJ PRT
The display changes as follows.
OFF
2. Turn the dial to select ON (protect enabled)
PRJ NAME or OFF (protect disabled).
±RJ001
RJ001 If protect is ON for the project, a lock icon is shown in the
Cursor bottom right of the main screen.

A cursor appears on the first character of the project

name.
PRJ 008
PRJ008
0 0 0 1- 1- 0
2. Use the cursor left/right keys and the dial or
00
the pads and keys in the rhythm section to Lock icon
input a character.
For details on entering characters, see page 33.
To return to the main screen after editing the name, press A change in the protect status becomes active
the [EXIT] key repeatedly. immediately. To return to the main screen after making
the setting, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly.

Protecting a project
NOTE
This operation lets you write-protect the currently loaded A project that is not protected will be automatically saved on
the SD card every time the power is turned off or the project
project, which disables project saving and editing. When
menu is called up. If you have finished a song, we
protect is ON, the following operations will not be
recommend to turn protect ON. This will prevent
allowed.
inadvertently saving changes caused by operation steps that
you have taken after finishing the song.
• Erasing a project
• Editing or recording on the recorder
• Changing the V-take
• Editing a patch for the insert effect and send/return
effect
• Recording or editing a rhythm pattern or rhythm
song
• Setting or deleting marker information
• Changing the names of various data

HINT
A project that has been protected can still be played
normally, and you can change the mixing balance and make
certain other changes, but the changes cannot be saved.

ZOOM MRS-8 107

MRS-8(E).book 108 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [MIDI]
This section explains the MIDI-related settings and functions of the MRS-8.

About MIDI Making MIDI-related settings

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard This section explains how to make MIDI-related settings.
that allows messages such as play data and sound data
(collectively called “MIDI messages”) to be exchanged
between devices including electronic musical Basic procedure
instruments and computers.
The procedure for making MIDI settings is similar for
The MRS-8 is equipped with a MIDI OUT connector that
most settings. The basic steps are as follows.
can send internally generated MIDI messages to other
MIDI compatible devices. This can be used to supply
rhythm pattern playing information and synchronization
1. From the main screen, press the [SONG/
PATTERN] key and then the [SYSTEM/
information.
UTILITY] key.
The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm
section related settings appears.

UTILITY
DRUM KIT
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
What you can do using MIDI the indication “UTILITY MIDI” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
The display changes as follows.
On the MRS-8, you can use MIDI for the following
functions.
MIDI
• Send play information
DRUM CH
You can send Note On/Off messages from the MRS-8
when hitting the pads or when playing a rhythm song/ In this condition, you can select MIDI-related setting
rhythm pattern. These can be used to play an external items.
MIDI sound source connected to the MIDI OUT
connector. 3. Use the cursor left/right keys to select one
of the following items.
• Send sync information
The MRS-8 can supply clock information based on • DRUM CH
internal tempo (Timing Clock) or absolute time Set the MIDI channel for sending playing information of
information in hours/minutes/seconds/frames (MIDI drum kit.
Ti m e C o d e ) t o a n e x t e r n a l M I D I d ev i c e , f o r • BASS CH
synchronization of transport operations. Set the MIDI channel for sending playing information of
bass program.
• Send control change information
• CLOCK
The MRS-8 can supply Control Change messages
Turn Timing Clock transmission on/off.
according to drum/bass sequence information
programmed in a rhythm pattern or rhythm song. • SPP
Turn Song Position Pointer transmission on/off
(information about current position in beats from the start

108 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 109 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [MIDI]

of the song). single channel via the MIDI OUT connector.

• COMMAND
Turn Start/Stop/Continue message transmission on/off. Turning Timing Clock
• MTC messages on or off
Turn MIDI Time Code transmission on/off.
This setting specifies whether the MIDI synchronization
message Timing Clock will be transmitted.
NOTE Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the
Control Change transmission is always enabled, except
indication “MIDI CLOCK” on the display. Then press the
when the drum kit/bass program send channel is set to off.
[ENTER] key and turn the dial to select one of the
following settings.
4. Press the [ENTER] key to display the
setting of the selected item, and turn the
• ON (Transmission on)
dial to change the setting.
Timing Clock information will be transmitted when the
For details on each item, refer to the following
MRS-8 is running (default setting).
explanation.
• OFF (Transmission off)
5. When you have finished making settings, Timing Clock information will not be transmitted.
press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to return to
the main screen.
CLOCK
ON
Setting the drum kit/bass
The Timing Clock information is derived by dividing a
program MIDI channel quarter note by 24. When Timing Clock is on, the clock
signal will calculated based on the tempo of the rhythm
You can specify the MIDI channels for the drum track
pattern/rhythm song that is playing.
and bass program.
In order for the external MIDI device to play back in
Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the
synchronization at an appropriate tempo, you will need to
indication “MIDI DRUM CH” or “MIDI BASS CH” on
specify the tempo of the rhythm pattern/rhythm song at
the display. Then turn the dial to select one of the
the MRS-8. To synchronize the measure indication at the
following settings.
MRS-8 and the MIDI device, the time signature setting at
both devices must be matched.
• 1 – 16CH
Select one of MIDI channels 1 – 16 (default: DRUM
CH=10CH, BASS CH=9CH) NOTE
Timing Clock information will be transmitted even if the
• OFF
drum/bass track is muted.
Channel messages (Note On/Off, Control Change etc.)
for the drum kit or bass program will not be sent.
HINT
• When using MIDI Timing Clock messages transmitted from
DRUM CH the MRS-8 to synchronize the transport locate operation at
10CH the external MIDI device, you should also turn on transmission
for Song Position Pointer and Start/Stop/Continue messages
If you specify a MIDI channel (1 – 16), hitting a pad of in addition to Timing Clock.
the MRS-8 or playing back a rhythm pattern or rhythm • If you transmit Timing Clock together with Note On/Off or
song will cause the drum/bass track playing information MTC information from the MRS-8, synchronization may
to be transmitted as Note On/Off messages in the selected become unstable. When transmitting Timing Clock,
channel. transmission of these messages should be turned off.

HINT
By selecting the same channel for the drum kit and bass
program, the playing information can be sent together on a

ZOOM MRS-8 109

MRS-8(E).book 110 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [MIDI]

Turning Song Position Pointer Turning MIDI Time Code (MTC)

messages on or off messages on or off
You can specify whether Song Position Pointer messages You can specify whether MIDI Time Code (MTC)
will be transmitted. Song Position Pointer is a MIDI messages used for synchronization will be transmitted.
message that indicates the current position as a beat/clock Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the
count from the start. Normally it is used in conjunction indication “MIDI MTC” on the display. Then press the
with Timing Clock. [ENTER] key and turn the dial to select one of the
Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the following settings.
indication “MIDI SPP” on the display. Then press the
[ENTER] key and turn the dial to select one of the • 24 (24 frames/second)
following settings.
• 25 (25 frames/second)

• ON (Transmission on) • 29.97nd (29.97 frames/second, non-drop)

MIDI Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted • 30nd (30 frames/second, non-drop)
when a locate operation is performed on the MRS-8 When the MRS-8 is running, MTC messages with the
(default setting). specified frame rate are sent out.
• OFF (Transmission off) • OFF (Transmission off)
Song Position Pointer messages will not be transmitted. MTC messages will not be transmitted.

SPP MTC
ON OFF
When using MTC to synchronize MIDI devices, the
Turning Start/Stop/Continue MRS-8 always functions as MTC master. Set up the other
messages on or off device to operate as MTC slave which receives MTC
messages and functions accordingly.
You can specify whether Start/Stop/Continue messages An example for synchronizing the MRS-8 with a
will be transmitted. Start/Stop/Continue are MIDI synthesizer is shown below.
messages that indicate the transport status of a device.
Normally these messages are used in conjunction with MTC master
Timing Clock. MTC slave
MIDI
Refer to steps 1 – 3 of “Basic procedure” to bring up the IN
indication “MIDI COMMAND” on the display. Then MTC Sequencer
press the [ENTER] key and turn the dial to select one of MIDI OUT
connector
the following settings. MRS-8

• ON (Transmission on)
The frame rate setting (24, 25, 29.97nd, 30) must always
The appropriate Start/Stop/Continue message will be
be matched at the master and slave side. Otherwise
transmitted when the MRS-8 stops or begins running
correct synchronization is not possible.
(default setting).
• OFF (Transmission off)
Start/Stop/Continue messages will not be transmitted. HINT
If you transmit MTC as well as other MIDI messages from the
MRS-8, synchronization may become unstable. When
COMMAND transmitting MIDI Time Code (MTC) messages, transmission
ON of other messages should be turned off.

110 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 111 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

This section explains various other functions of the MRS-8.

4. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up

Playing several projects the indication “PROJECT SEQ PLAY” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
continuously
The display changes as follows.
(sequence play)

The MRS-8 lets you line up the master tracks from

SEQ PLAY
EMPTY 1
multiple projects saved on the SD card and play them
Playlist number
continuously in a specified order (sequence play). This is
handy to record several projects on an external recorder,
or to play the accompaniment to multiple songs during a The display shows the screen for selecting a playlist. The
live performance. second line of the display shows the number of the
To use sequence play, you create a playlist which selected playlist and the number of projects registered in
specifies the order of projects. Up to 10 different playlists that playlist. If an empty playlist has been selected, the
can be created per SD card. Up to 99 projects can be display shows “EMPTY”.
specified per playlist.
5. Turn the dial to select the playlist for which
to register projects, and press the [EDIT]
Creating a playlist key.
The display changes as follows.
Register projects in a playlist as follows.

1. Verify that the V-take you want to play is END OF

selected for each project’s master track. LIST 1

Playback number

NOTE
Projects in which an unrecorded V-take is selected for the This screen lets you register projects in the playlist. The
master track cannot be registered in a playlist. bottom right of the display shows the playback number
which indicates the sequential position of the current
2. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM project.
UTILITY] key in the display section. The “END OF LIST” indication denotes the end of the
The display changes as follows. playlist. When the playlist is empty, the indication “END
OF LIST” appears at the beginning of the list.

SYSTEM 6. Turn the dial to select the project to register

PROJECT at the beginning of the playlist.
The project is registered in the first position of the
3. Press the [ENTER] key. playlist. The “END OF LIST” indication moves to the
The project menu for various project related functions next playback number.
appears.
(1) Project number/project name

PROJECT PRJ 001

SELECT MRS8DEMO 1
4 36 120

(2) V-take duration (3) Playback number

ZOOM MRS-8 111

MRS-8(E).book 112 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

(1) Project number/project name • To delete a single project from a playlist

Shows the number and name of the project registered in Use the cursor left/right keys to select the position
the playlist. number of the project to delete. Press the [FUNCTION]
key in the display section. (The indication “DELETE
(2) V-take duration SURE?” appears on the display.) Press the [ENTER] key.
Shows the playing time of the V-take selected for the The project is deleted and subsequent projects are
master track of the registered project, in minutes, renumbered.
seconds, and milliseconds.
• To delete all projects from a playlist
(3) Playback number O n t h e p l a y l i s t r eg i s t r a t i o n s c r e e n , p r e s s t h e
Shows the playback position of the project. [FUNCTION] key in the display section. (The indication
“DELETE SURE?” appears on the display.) Press the
cursor down key. (The indication “ALL DEL SURE?”
NOTE
appears on the display.) To carry out the operation, press
• Projects in which an unrecorded V-take is selected for the
the [ENTER] key.
master track cannot be registered in a playlist. If the name of
a desired project does not appear on the display, check
whether a recorded V-take is selected for the master track. • To switch the V-take for the master track
• A master track whose selected V-take is extremely short (4 Press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to return to the main
seconds or less) cannot be registered in a playlist. screen. Load the project for which you want to switch the
V-take, and select the V-take for the master track. Then
7. Press the cursor right key. return to the playlist registration screen.
The display changes as follows.
9. When you have registered all desired
projects in the playlist, press the [EXIT] key
END OF repeatedly to return to the main screen.
LIST 2

NOTE
In this condition, you can select the second project to • The playlist can be edited and played from any project.
play. • If the V-take data of the master track of a project registered in
a playlist are deleted from the SD card, or when the V-take
8. Turn the dial to select the next project to selection has been changed to an empty V-take, the
play. respective playlist becomes empty.
Use the same procedure to select projects for subsequent
positions. A maximum of 99 projects can be registered in
a playlist. Playing a playlist
To edit the contents of a playlist, proceed as follows.
Select the playlist for continuous project playback as
follows.
• To change projects in a playlist
Use the cursor left/right keys to select the position
number for which you want to change the project, and use
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM
UTILITY] key in the display section.
the dial to select another project.
The display changes as follows.
• To insert a project in a playlist
Use the cursor left/right keys to select the position
number where you want to insert a project. Press the
SYSTEM
PROJECT
[FUNCTION] key in the display section twice. (The
indication “INSERT?” appears on the display.) Turn the
dial to select another project, and press the [ENTER] key. 2. Press the [ENTER] key.
The project is inserted and subsequent projects are The project menu for various project related functions
renumbered. appears.

112 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 113 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

• REW [T] key

Stop playback, jump to the beginning of the previous
PROJECT project, and resume playback.
SELECT
When playback of the last project is completed, the
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up recorder stops.
the indication “PROJECT SEQ PLAY” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
HINT
The display shows the screen for selecting a playlist. During playback, you can use the [MASTER] fader to adjust
When a playlist is selected for which projects have been the playback volume. (Other faders have no effect.)
registered, the counter in the bottom of the display shows
the total playback time of all projects in the playlist. 6. To return to the main screen, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly.
SEQ PLAY
3 Songs 1
20 15 320

Total playing time

of projects List number

4. Turn the dial to select the desired playlist.

5. Press the PLAY [R] key.

Projects are played in the order as registered in the
playlist. During playback, the display changes as follows.

PLAY
PRJ000 2

Name of project Playback number

being played

When a project has played through, the master track of

the next project is automatically loaded and played.
During project playback, the following keys can be used
to select a project, pause play, or locate a certain point.

• PLAY [R] key

Play from the start of the current project.

• STOP [P] key

Stop project playback and return to the start of the current
project.

• ZERO [U] key

Return to the start of the project registered for playback
position 1.

• FF [Y] key
Stop playback, jump to the beginning of the next project,
and resume playback.

ZOOM MRS-8 113

MRS-8(E).book 114 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

4. Play the note that you want to tune.

Using the tuner function The pitch is automatically detected, and the display
shows the nearest note name (C, C#, D, D#, E...). The
display also indicates by how much the current pitch is
The MRS-8 incorporates a versatile tuner that can also different from the correct pitch.
accommodate 7-string guitar, 5-string bass and other
unconventional tunings. This section explains how to use
the tuner function. CHROMATC
>>A
Using the chromatic tuner
The chromatic tuner which can automatically detect pitch
Pitch is flat
> A
in semitone steps operates as follows. > A
1. Connect the instrument that you want to >>A
tune to one of the INPUT 1/2 connectors
and set the respective INPUT [ON/OFF] key
>A
to ON. Correct pitch <A >
When using INPUT 1, the [INPUT 1 SELECT] switch on
the rear panel must be set to the correct position. A <
A <<
HINT
• If you press the [MIC] key so that it is lit, the internal
A <
microphone will be active and can be used for tuning.
• If both inputs are activated, the input signals will be mixed and
Pitch is sharp A <
sent to the tuner. Set the INPUT [ON/OFF] key of the input not
required for tuning to OFF. 5. Adjust the pitch until the “<>” indication
encloses the desired note.
2. Press the [INSERT EFFECT] key in the
effect section repeatedly, until the key is 6. To change the reference pitch of the tuner,
out. turn the dial during tuner operation.
The insert effect is bypassed and the display alternately The reference pitch of the tuner is set to center A = 440
shows “INSERT BYPASS” and “TUNER→ENTER.” Hz by default. The reference pitch can be adjusted over
the range of 435 – 445 Hz, in 1-Hz steps.
3. Press the [ENTER] key.
The tuner function is turned on. In the default condition
of a project, the chromatic tuner will be selected. CALIB
440Hz
Currently selected tuner
When the value was changed, the original display will
CHROMATC return after a while. You can also press the [EXIT] key or
__ one of the cursor keys to return.

HINT
HINT
• The reference pitch setting is saved individually for each
• You can switch the tuning type by pressing the left and right
project.
cursor keys. For details, see the next section.
• When you change the reference pitch of the tuner, the pitch of
• While the tuner is operating, all effects are disabled.
the rhythm section bass program will also change
accordingly.

114 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 115 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

7. When you have finished using the tuner While the tuner function is active, the cursor left/right
function, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to keys serve to switch the tuning type. Tuning types and
return to the main screen. notes for each string are listed in the table below.

For example, when you select the tuning type

Using other tuning types “GUITAR”, the display shows the following information.

The MRS-8 allows various other tuning types besides

chromatic tuning, including standard tuning for guitar GUITAR
and bass, and various special tuning functions. >> E 6
Using the example of a guitar/bass connected to the Target note String number
INPUT 1 connector, the following section describes how for string number
to use other tuning types.

1. Connect the instrument that you want to HINT

While the tuner is operating, all effects are disabled.
tune to the INPUT 1 connector and set the
INPUT [ON/OFF] key 1 to ON.
Make sure that the [INPUT 1 SELECT] switch is set to
4. Play the indicated string as an open string,
and perform tuning.
GUITAR/BASS. If the [MIC] key is lit, press the key so
that it is flashing or out.
HINT
If required, you can change the reference pitch of the tuner
HINT
(A = 440 Hz). The procedure is the same as for the chromatic
When the internal mic is activated, it can be used for tuning.
tuner.
This is convenient for tuning an acoustic guitar.

2. Press the [INSERT EFFECT] key in the

5. Use the cursor up/down keys to select
other string numbers.
effect section repeatedly, until the key is
Tune the other strings in the same way.
out.
The insert effect is bypassed and the display alternately
shows “INSERT BYPASS” and “TUNER→ENTER.”
6. When you have finished using the tuner
function, press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to
return to the main screen.
3. Press the [ENTER] key to turn the tuner
function on, and use the cursor left/right
keys to select the tuning type.

Tuning type GUITAR BASS OPEN-A OPEN-D OPEN-E OPEN-G DADGAD

1 E G E D E D D
2 B D C# A B B A
3 G A A F# G# G G
String number/note name 4 D E E D E D D
5 A B A A B G A
6 E E D E D D
7 B

ZOOM MRS-8 115

MRS-8(E).book 116 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

Switching the level meter Adjusting the display

display type contrast and backlight

In the default condition of a project, the level meter below You can adjust the display contrast and turn the backlight
the display indicates the level of the signal after passing on and off. To do this, proceed as follows.
through the faders (post-fader). If required, you can
change the setting so that the signal before passing 1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
through the level faders (pre-fader) is shown. To do this, UTILITY] key in the display section.
proceed as follows. The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the
display.
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
UTILITY] key in the display section. 2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the the indication “SYSTEM LCD” on the
display. display, and press the [ENTER] key.
A display related item can be selected.
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
the indication “SYSTEM LVL MET” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key. LCD
The current level meter setting will be displayed.
LIGHT
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to select
LVL MET “LIGHT” (backlight on/off) or CONTRAST
POST (adjust display contrast), and press the
[ENTER] key.
The settings have the following meaning.
• When LIGHT was selected
• POST Turn the dial to set the backlight to ON or OFF.
The meter shows the level of the signal after passing
through the faders.
LIGHT
• PRE ON
The meter shows the level of the signal before passing
through the faders. • When CONTRAST was selected
Turn the dial to set the contrast in the range from 1 to 8.
3. Turn the dial to change the setting.

4. When the setting is complete, press the CONTRAST

[EXIT] key repeatedly to return to the main 1
screen.
4. When the setting is complete, press the
[EXIT] key repeatedly to return to the main
screen.

116 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 117 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

Depending on the type of SD card that was inserted,

Changing the SD card operation changes as follows.

• SD card not ready for use in MRS-8 was

The SD card should normally only be removed or inserted
inserted while the MRS-8 is turned off. However, by The indication “FORMAT SURE?” appears on the
using the following procedure, the SD card can be display. When you press the [ENTER] key at this point,
removed or inserted while the MRS-8 is on. the SD card will be formatted (initialized) and the data of
all projects that were handled up to this point will be
NOTE saved on the card (except for audio data).
If the SD card is changed without following the procedure When the formatting and saving process is completed, the
below and while the MRS-8 is on, data may be permanently main screen appears.
destroyed.

HINT
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/ If you cancel the format by pressing the [EXIT] key, the
UTILITY] key in the display section. indication “CARD NotExist” appears again. In this case, the
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the unit operates as if no card were inserted.
display.
• SD card already formatted in MRS-8 was
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up inserted
the indication “SYSTEM CARD” on the The indication “LoadData <-ENT->” appears on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key. display. When you press the [ENTER] key twice at this
The menu for various SD card functions appears. point, the project with the lowest number stored on the
SD card will be loaded.

CARD You can save all project data up to this point (except audio
EXCHANGE data) on the new card. To do this, use the cursor left/right
keys when “LoadData” is displayed to bring up the
3. Verify that the indication “CARD indication “SaveData” and press the [ENTER] key. In this
EXCHANGE” is shown on the display and condition, you can select the copy target project number.
press the [ENTER] key. Turn the dial to select the number and press the [ENTER]
If currently a SD card is inserted in the MRS-8, the key twice. The data are saved, and then the project is
indication “CARD Exist” is shown. loaded.

CARD
Exist
While this screen is being shown, the SD card can be
changed.

4. Replace the SD card.

For information on how to remove the SD card, see page
13. When the card is removed, the display indication
changes to “CARD NotExist”.

CARD
NotExist

ZOOM MRS-8 117

MRS-8(E).book 118 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

Formatting an SD card Checking the available SD

card capacity/project size
To format an SD card in the MRS-8, proceed as follows.
This operation displays the remaining capacity of the SD
NOTE card and the size of the currently loaded project.
When you format a card, all data already on the card will be
erased and cannot be restored. Perform this operation with 1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/
care. UTILITY] key in the display section.
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the
1. From the main screen, press the [SYSTEM/ display.
UTILITY] key in the display section.
The indication “SYSTEM PROJECT” appears on the 2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
display. the indication “SYSTEM CARD” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
2. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up The menu for various SD card functions appears.
the indication “SYSTEM CARD” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
The menu for various SD card functions appears. CARD
EXCHANGE
CARD 3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
EXCHANGE the indication “CARD CAPACITY” on the
display, and press the [ENTER] key.
3. Use the cursor left/right keys to bring up
the indication “CARD FORMAT” on the 4. Use the cursor up/down keys to select the
display, and press the [ENTER] key. desired screen from one the following
The display changes as follows. options.

• REMAIN (MB units)

FORMAT This shows the remaining space on the SD card in MB
SURE? (megabyte) units.

4. To proceed with formatting, press the

[ENTER] key. REMAIN
During formatting, the indication “Format wait...” is
000037MB
shown. When the process is completed, a new project is
automatically created and the main screen appears. • REMAIN (m/s units)
By pressing the [EXIT] key instead of the [ENTER] key, The approximate recordable time remaining on the SD
you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a card (converted into one track) is shown in minutes (m),
time. and seconds (s).

REMAIN
0007m24s
• PRJ SIZ (MB units)
This shows the size of the currently loaded project in MB
(megabyte) units.

118 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 119 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Reference [Other Functions]

PRJ SIZE
00007MB
• PRJ SIZ (m/s units)
This shows the size of the currently loaded project in
terms of recorded time (converted into one track), in
minutes (m), and seconds (s).

PRJ SIZE
0001m09s
To return to the main screen, press the [EXIT] key
repeatedly.

NOTE
• These screens are for display only and contain no settings
that can be changed.
• The remaining recordable time is an approximation. Use it for
general reference only.

ZOOM MRS-8 119

MRS-8(E).book 120 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Troubleshooting
If there are problems during operation of the MRS-8, check the following points first.

• Make sure that the [INPUT 1 SELECT] switch is set

Problems during playback to the appropriate position for the instrument
connected to the INPUT 1 connector.

■ No sound, or sound is very weak ■ The display indicates “Don’t Play” and
• Check the connections to your monitor system, and playback is not possible
the volume setting of the system.
The recorder will not operate in the current screen.
Press the [EXIT] key repeatedly to switch to the main
• Make sure that the [MASTER] fader is raised.
screen.

• Make sure that the status keys in the mixer section

■ The indication “Stop Recorder” is shown
are lit in green and that the faders are raised. If a key
is out, press it to make it light up in green.
on the display, and operation is not
possible.
■ Playback sound is distorted The current operation is not possible while the
• Lower the faders of recorded tracks so that the level transport is in playback mode. Press the STOP [P]
meter 0 (dB) segment does not light. key to stop the recorder.

• If the EQ gain of the mixer is set extremely high, the

sound may be audibly distorted even if the fader for
the track is lowered. Set the EQ to an appropriate Problems during recording
value.

■ Operating the fader does not affect the ■ Cannot record on a track
volume • Make sure that you have selected a recording track.
• On channels for which stereo link is turned on, the
fader of the even-numbered channel will have no • Recording is not possible if the project is write-
effect. Either turn stereo link off ( → p. 60), or protected. Either turn protect off (→ p. 107), or use
operate the fader of the odd-numbered channel. a different project.

• The [RHYTHM] fader controls only the sound • If the indication “CARD PROTECT” is shown on
(drum kit or bass program) currently selected for the the display, write protect is enabled for the inserted
rhythm section. Press the [DRUM/BASS] key in the SD card. Slide the write protect switch on the card
rhythm section repeatedly to select the desired up to turn write protect off.
sound, and then operate the fader.
• If the indication “FULL” appears during recording,
■ No sound from input signal, or sound is the SD card is full. Change to another SD card or
erase unneeded data to free up space. The V-take
very weak
currently being recorded will not be saved.
• Make sure that the respective INPUT [ON/OFF] key
is lit. ■ The signal from an instrument or mic
connected to an INPUT connector is not
• Make sure that the respective [INPUT] control is
raised. available
While the built-in mic is active, the INPUT 1
• Make sure that the record level setting (→ p. 15) is connector cannot be used. Press the [MIC] key so that
appropriate. it is flashing or out. This turns the built-in mic off.

120 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 121 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Troubleshooting

■ The recorded sound is distorted ■ Cannot hear the rhythm song playback
• Check whether the input sensitivity setting and • Make sure that you have not selected an empty
record level setting are appropriate. rhythm song (→ p. 76).

• When the insert effect is applied to the input, check • Make sure that the selected rhythm song does not
whether the effect output level (patch level) setting include an event with a volume level zero setting
is appropriate. (→ p. 83).

■ No sound when you tap the pads

If the pad sensitivity has been set to “SOFT”, loud
Problems with effects sounds will not be produced even when you tap the
pad strongly. Change the pad sensitivity setting
(→ p. 90).
■ Insert effect does not work
• Make sure that the [INSERT EFFECT] key is lit. ■ Cannot create a new rhythm pattern/
rhythm song
• Check whether the insert effect position has been If the display indicates “SEQ FULL”, the rhythm
selected correctly. section memory has been used to maximum capacity.
Delete unneeded rhythm patterns or songs to free up
■ Send/return effect does not work memory.
• Make sure that the [SEND/RETURN] key is lit.
■ Notes recorded in the rhythm pattern do
• Make sure that the send level for the track is raised not play
(→ p. 28).
Notes that exceed the maximum polyphony (6 sounds for
drum kit, 1 sound for bass program) will not be played.
Delete some of the notes that have been recorded to stay
within the maximum polyphony.
Problems with the rhythm
section

■ Cannot hear the rhythm pattern playback

Problems with MIDI
• Press the [DRUM/BASS] key repeatedly to select
the desired sound (drum kit/bass program), and then ■ Cannot synchronize with external MIDI
operate the [RHYTHM] fader. device
• Make sure that the MIDI cable is correctly connected
• Press the [DRUM/BASS] key repeatedly to select
from the MIDI OUT connector of the MRS-8 to the
the desired sound (drum kit/bass program), and then
MIDI IN connector of the external device.
press the [RHYTHM] status key repeatedly until the
key is lit in green.
• Synchronization with an external MIDI device is
only possible by using the MIDI clock or MTC
• If the drum/bass sequence level has been set to zero
output from the MRS-8.
within a pattern, that sound will not be heard. Raise
the level setting for the drum/bass sequence (→ p.
• Make sure that the external MIDI device is set to
74).
receive MIDI clock or MTC and synchronize to it.

• When synchronizing on the timing clock, make sure

that output is enabled for Timing Clock, Song
Position Pointer, and Start/Stop/Continue messages
at the MRS-8 (→ p. 110).

ZOOM MRS-8 121

MRS-8(E).book 122 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Troubleshooting

• When synchronizing on the MTC (MIDI Time

Code), make sure that the frame rate setting of both
devices is matched and that the external MIDI
device is set to playback standby (→ p. 110).

Other problems

■ Cannot create a new project or copy a

project
• If the write protect switch of the SD card has been
set to the write protect position, data cannot be saved
on the card.

• If the display indicates “FULL”, there is no more

free space on the SD card. Change to another SD
card or erase unneeded data to free up space.

■ Cannot save a project

• When a project has been set to write protect status,
overwrite/save cannot be carried out. Turn protect
off (→ p. 107).

• If the display indicates “PRJ FULL”, no more

projects can be created on the SD card. Change to
another SD card or erase unneeded projects to free
up space.

■ SD card is not recognized

• Format the SD card in the MRS-8 (→ p. 118).

• The MRS-8 cannot use SD cards with a capacity of

less than 16 MB. If such a card is inserted, the
indication “Too Small” is shown.

122 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 123 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix
● Effect
Specifications Algorithm 8 (CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS
SIM, BASS, MIC, DUAL MIC,
LINE, MASTERING)
● Recorder
Module 6 for insert, 1 for send/return
Physical track 8
Type 94 for insert, 6 for send/return
Virtual take 80 (10 takes per track)
Patch 300 for insert, 60 for send/return
Drum track 1 (stereo)
Tuner type Chromatic, guitar, bass,
Bass track 1
open A/D/E/G, D modal
Simultaneous recordable track
2
● Rhythm
Simultaneous playback track
Voice 6 for drum, 1 for bass
11 (8 audio + stereo drum + bass)
Drum kit 8
Recording time 256MB 100min
Drum sound 27 per kit (9 pads x 3 banks)
1GB 400min
Bass sound 5
(in mono track)
Pad 9 (velocity sensitive)
* Regardless of the card capacity,
Resolution 48 PPQN
continuous recording can be
performed up to 180 minutes. Beat 1/4 – 8/4

* Recording times are Rhythm pattern 511 per project

approximate. Actual times may Rhythm song 10 per project

be somewhat shorter, depending Measure 99 per rhythm pattern
on the setting conditions. Note/event Approx. 20000 per rhythm song
Project 1000 per card Tempo 40.0 – 250.0 BPM
Marker 100 points per project
Locator minute/second/millisecond,
measure/beat/tick A/D conversion 24-bit, 64-times oversampling
Track editing Copy, move, erase, exchange, trim, D/A conversion 24-bit, 128-times oversampling
fade-in/out, reverse
Sampling frequency 44.1 kHz
Other function Punch-in/out, bounce recording,
A-B repeat, capture/swap

● Mixer
Fader 8
Level meter Post-fader/pre-fader
Track parameter 2-band equalizer, effect send level,
panning (balance)
Stereo link Track 1/2 or 3/4 linkable

ZOOM MRS-8 123

MRS-8(E).book 124 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Display 55 x 35 mm custom LCD with Power supply

backlight AC adaptor DC 9 V, 300 mA (ZOOM AD-
Input 1 Standard mono phone jack 0006)

Input impedance10 kilohms Battery 4 x IEC R6 (size AA);

(MIC/LINE), 470 kilohms approx. battery life 4 hours/5
(GUITAR/BASS) hours (display backlight on/off)
Input 2 XLR-3-31/standard phone combo
jack Dimension 300 (W) x 165 (D) x 60 (H) mm
(Balanced) Weight 1.1 kg without batteries
input impedance 1 kilohm, pin 2
hot
(Unbalanced)
* 0 dBm = 0.775 Vrms
input impedance 10 kilohms
* Design and specifications are subject to change without
Input level -50 dBm < continuously variable
notice.
< +4 dBm
Master output RCA phono jack (L/R)
Output load impedance 10
kilohms or more
Rated output level -10 dBm
Headphones output Standard stereo phone jack
50 mW into 32-ohm load
MIDI OUT

124 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 125 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Effect Parameters

Insert Effect
■ CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm
COMP module

Type Parameter
SENS ATTACK LEVEL
COMPRESS
Keeps the dynamic range consistent.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
SENS 0 – 10 Adjusts the compression input sensitivity.
ATTACK 0 – 10 Adjusts the compression attack speed.
LEVEL 1–8 Adjusts the module output level.

PRE AMP/DRIVE module

Type Parameter
J-CLN Clean sound that models a transistor combo amp.
US-CLN Clean sound that models a built-in type vacuum tube amp.
US-DRV Drive sound that models a built-in type vacuum tube amp.
TWEED Model of a small built-in vacuum tube combo amp with dry distortion.
CLASS A Unique crunch sound that models a British-style combo amp.
UK-CRU Crunch sound that models a British-style vacuum tube stack amp.
UK-DRV Drive sound that models a British-style vacuum tube stack amp.
CMB 335 Models a vacuum tube combo amp characterized by long sustain.
MTL PNL High-gain drive sound that models a vacuum tube stack amp.
BLK BTM Model of a vacuum tube stack amp, characterized by fat bass and delicate distortion.
MD LEAD Drive sound that models a high-gain amp suitable for lead guitar.
FZ-STK 60's sound typical of a Fuzz unit played through an amp stack.
TE BASS Model of a bass amp with a distinctively clean low-mid range.
FD BASS Model of a bass amp with vintage-style drive.
GAIN TONE LEVEL
Parameters for type J-CLN to FD BASS are the same.
SNS BASS Trebly drive sound for bass.
CR+CAB Combination of crunch and cabinet simulator.
TS+CAB Combination of vintage overdrive and cabinet simulator.
GV+CAB Combination of vintage distortion and cabinet simulator.
MZ+CAB Combination of metal-style distortion and cabinet simulator.
9002+CAB Combination of the Zoom 9002 distortion and cabinet simulator.
GAIN TONE LEVEL CABINET SPEAKER DEPTH
Parameters for type SNS BASS to 9002+CAB are the same.
TOP BODY LEVEL CABINET SPEAKER DEPTH
ACO SIM
Transforms the sound of an electric guitar into an acoustic-guitar-like tone.
COLOR TONE LEVEL CABINET SPEAKER DEPTH
E-AcPRE
Pre-amp for electroacoustic guitar.
TONE LEVEL
BASS SIM
Transforms the sound of an electric guitar into a bass-guitar-like tone.
CABINET SPEAKER DEPTH
CABINET
Simulation of the cabinet of a guitar/bass amp.

ZOOM MRS-8 125

MRS-8(E).book 126 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
GAIN 1 – 30 Adjusts the amount of gain.
TONE 0 – 10 Adjusts the tone.
LEVEL 1–8 Adjusts the module output level.
Selects the cabinet type
CM Combo-type cabinet.
br Produces a brighter tone than CM.
CABINET Ft Cabinet with a flat response.
St Stack-type cabinet.
bC Combo-type cabinet for bass.
bS Stack-type cabinet for bass.
Selects the loudspeaker type.
C1 Combo-type guitar amp with one 12 inch speaker.
C2 Combo-type guitar amp with two 12 inch speakers.
C3 Combo-type guitar amp with one 10 inch speaker.
SPEAKER
GS Stack-type guitar amp with four 10 inch speakers.
GW Multiple stack-type amps placed together.
bC Combo-type bass amp with one 15 inch speaker.
bS Stack-type bass amp with four 6.5 inch speakers.
DEPTH 0 – 10 Adjusts the cabinet resonance of the speaker.
TOP 1 – 30 Adjusts the resonance of the strings.
BODY 0 – 10 Adjusts the resonance of the body.
COLOR 1–4 Adjusts the character of the electroacoustic guitar preamp.

3 BAND EQ module

Type Parameter
HIGH MID LOW LEVEL
3BandEQ
Three-band equalizer.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
HIGH -12 – 12 Boosts/cuts the high-frequency range.
MID -12 – 12 Boosts/cuts the mid-frequency range.
LOW -12 – 12 Boosts/cuts the low-frequency range.
LEVEL 1–8 Adjusts the module output level.

MODULATION/DELAY module

Type Parameter
DEPTH RATE MIX
CHORUS
Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound.
DEPTH RATE MIX
V-CHORUS
Simulates the warm sound of a vintage effect.
DEPTH RATE FB
FLANGER
Produces a unique, undulating sound.
POSITION RATE COLOR
PHASER
Produces a swooshing sound.
DEPTH RATE CLIP
TREMOLO
Periodically varies the level of the sound.
WIDTH RATE CLIP
AUTO PAN
Pereodically moves the stereo position of the sound.
FLT TYPE POSITION RESONANC SENS
AUTO WAH
Gives a varying wah sound that depends on the picking intensity.
SHIFT TONE BALANCE
PITCH
Modifies the pitch of the direct sound.
POSITION TIME CURVE
SLOW-ATK
Creates a “violin playing” sound with soft attack.
DEPTH RATE BALANCE
VIBE
Automatic vibrato effect.

126 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 127 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

DEPTH RATE RESONANC

STEP
Changes the sound with step-like filter characteristics.
POSITION RATE BALANCE
RING MOD
Produces a metallic sound.
POSITION RESO SENS
CRY
Talking-modulator-like effect.
FREQ DEPTH LowBoost
EXCITER
Gives the sound more focus and spatial definition.
SIZE TONE MIX
AIR
Simulates the air ambience of the room, giving the sound spatial depth.
TIME WET LVL DRY LVL
WIDE
Simulates a stereo recording with two microphones.
TIME FB MIX
DELAY
Delay effect with a delay time of up to 2.9 seconds.
TIME FB MIX
ECHO
Delay effect with warm sound, up to 2.9 second delay time.
FLT TYPE POSITION FREQ R MODE R WAVE R SYNC
FIX-WAH
Changes the wah frequency in sync with rhythm tempo.
TYPE TONE R WAVE R SYNC
ARRM-PIT
Changes the pitch in sync with rhythm tempo.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
EXCITER: 0 – 30
DEPTH Adjusts the depth of the effect.
Others: 0 – 10
TREMOLO: 1 – 30, t0 – t9, M1
FLANGER, PHASER, Adjusts the speed of the effect. The "tx" or "Mx" setting results in sync with the
RATE rhythm tempo.
AUTO PAN: 1 – 30, t0 – t9, M1 – M4
Others: 1 – 30
MIX 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect.
FLANGER: -10 – 10
FB Adjusts the amount of feedback.
DELAY, ECHO: 0 – 10
AF, bF Selects the module location from AF; after the 3 BAND EQ module and bF; before
POSITION the PRE AMP/DRIVE module.
Specifies the type of phase tone.
1 4-stage phaser
COLOR 2 4-stage phaser with inverted feedback
3 8-stage phaser
4 8-stage phaser with inverted feedback
CLIP 0 – 10 Emphasizes the effect.
WIDTH 0 – 10 Adjusts the width between L/R.
FLT TYPE bPF, LPF Specifies the filter type.
AUTO WAH, CRY: 1 – 10
RESONANC Adjusts the effect character intensity.
STEP: 0 – 10
SENS -10 – -1, 1 – 10 Adjusts the effect sensitivity.
SHIFT -12.0 – 24.0 Adjust the pitch shift amount. The value “1.0” corresponds to semitone.
TONE 0 – 10 Adjusts the tone.
BALANCE 0 – 30 Adjusts the balance between the direct sound and effect sound.
SLOW-ATK: 1 – 30 Adjusts the attack speed.
TIME WIDE: 1 – 64 Adjusts the delay time in 1-ms steps. The "tx" or "M1" setting results in sync with
DELAY, ECHO: 1 - 2900, t1 - t9, M1 the rhythm tempo.
CURVE 0 – 10 Adjusts the attack curve.
EXCITER: 1 – 5 Adjusts the frequency.
FREQ
FIX-WAH: 1 – 50 Adjusts wah effect center frequency.
LowBoost 0 – 10 Emphasizes the low frequency range.
SIZE 1 – 10 Adjusts the spatial width.
WET LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound.
DRY LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the direct sound.
LEVEL 1-8 Adjusts the module output level.

ZOOM MRS-8 127

MRS-8(E).book 128 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Selects the changing width.

oFF Frequency stays constant.
UP Minimum→ maximum
R MODE
dn Maximum→ minimum
HI Setting value → maximum
Lo Minimum→ setting value
Selects the control waveform.
1 Rising sawtooth wave
2 Rising fin wave
3 Falling sawtooth wave
R WAVE 4 Falling fin wave
5 Triangle wave
6 Second power triangle wave
7 Sine wave
8 Square wave
Adjusts the control waveform cycle.
0.5 Eighth note
1 Quarter note
R SYNC
2 Half note
3 Dotted half note
b1 – b4 1 measure - 4 measures
Selects the pitch change type.
1 Semitone lower → original
2 Original → semitone lower
3 Doubling → detune + original
4 Detune + original → doubling
5 Original → 1 octave higher
6 1 octave higher → original
7 Original → 2 octaves lower
TYPE 8 2 octaves lower → original
9 1 octave lower + origina → 1 octave higher + original
10 1 octave higher + original → 1 octave lower + original
11 Perfect 5th lower + original → perfect 4th higher + original
12 Perfect 4rth higher + original → perfect 5th lower + original
13 0 Hz + original → 1 octave higher
14 1 octave higher → 0 Hz + original
15 0 Hz + original → 1 octave higher + original
16 1 octave higher + original → 0 Hz + original

Sync settings of RATE and TIME parameters

Setting Sync cycle
t0 32nd note
t1 16th note
t2 Quarter triplet
t3 Dotted 16th note
t4 8th note
t5 Half triplet
t6 Dotted 8th note
t7 Quarter note
t8 Dotted quarter note
t9 Half note
M1 Whole note
M2 2 x whole note
M3 3 x whole note
M4 4 x whole note

ZNR module

Type Parameter
THRSHOLD
ZNR
Cuts noise during performance pauses.

128 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 129 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
THRSHOLD OFF, 1 – 30 Adjusts the sensitivity. Set this high as far as the attacks or decays sound natural.

■ MIC algorithm
COMP/LIM module

Type Parameter
THRSHOLD RATIO ATTACK LEVEL
COMPRESS
Keeps the dynamic range consistent.
THRSHOLD RATIO RELEASE LEVEL
LIMITER
Controls the signal peeks.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
THRSHOLD -24 – 0 Adjusts the sensitivity.
COMP: 1 – 26
RATIO Adjusts the compression degree of the signal.
LIMIT: 1 – 54, ∞
ATTACK 0 – 10 Adjusts the compression attack speed.
LEVEL 0 – 12 Adjusts the module output level.
RELEASE 0 – 10 Adjusts the time between the threshold and compression finish.

MIC PRE module

Type Parameter
COLOR TONE LEVEL DE-ESSER
MIC PRE
Preamp for microphone.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
Adjust the frequency response.
1 Flat response
2 Low cut
COLOR 3 Acoustic guitar characteristics
4 Acoustic guitar characteristics with low cut
5 Vocal characteristics
6 Vocal characteristics with low cut
TONE 0 – 10 Adjusts the tone.
LEVEL 1–8 Adjusts the module output level.
DE-ESSER 0 – 10 Adjusts the cut amount of vocal sibilants.

3 BAND EQ module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

MODULATION/DELAY module

Type Parameter
DEPTH RATE MIX
CHORUS
Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound.
DEPTH RATE MIX
V-CHORUS
Simulates the warm sound of a vintage effect.
DEPTH RATE FB
FLANGER
Produces a unique, undulating sound.
RATE COLOR
PHASER
Produces a swooshing sound.
DEPTH RATE CLIP
TREMOLO
Periodically varies the level of the sound.

ZOOM MRS-8 129

MRS-8(E).book 130 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

WIDTH RATE CLIP

AUTO PAN
Pereodically moves the stereo position of the sound.
SHIFT TONE BALANCE
PITCH
Modifies the pitch of the direct sound.
TIME CURVE
SLOW-ATK
Creates a “violin playing” sound with soft attack.
DEPTH RATE BALANCE
VIBE
Automatic vibrato effect.
DEPTH RATE RESONANC
STEP
Changes the sound with step-like filter characteristics.
RATE BALANCE
RING MOD
Produces a metallic sound.
RESONANC SENS
CRY
Talking-modulator-like effect.
FREQ DEPTH LowBoost
EXCITER
Gives the sound more focus and spatial definition.
SIZE TONE MIX
AIR
Simulates the air ambience of the room, giving the sound spatial depth.
TIME FB MIX
DELAY
Delay effect with a delay time of up to 2.9 seconds.
TIME FB MIX
ECHO
Delay effect with warm sound, up to 2.9 second delay time.
TIME TONE MIX
DOUBLING
Doubling effect with a delay time of up to 100 milliseconds.
FLT TYPE FREQ R MODE R WAVE R SYNC
FIX-WAH
Changes the wah frequency in sync with rhythm tempo.
TYPE TONE R WAVE R SYNC
ARRM-PIT
Changes the pitch in sync with rhythm tempo.

Regarding the parameter description, see the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

ZNR module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

■ LINE algorithm
COMP/LIM module
See the MIC algorithm.

ISOLATOR module

Type Parameter
XOVER LO XOVER HI MIX HIGH MIX MID MIX LOW
ISOLATOR
Divides the signal into three frequency bands, and specifies the mix amount each.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
XOVER LO 50 – 16000 Adjusts the frequency for bass/midrange division.
XOVER HI 50 – 16000 Adjusts the frequency for midrange/treble division.
MIX HIGH OFF, -24 – 6 Adjusts the treble mix amount.
MIX MID OFF, -24 – 6 Adjusts the midrange mix amount.
MIX LOW OFF, -24 – 6 Adjusts the bass mix amount.

3 BAND EQ module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

130 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 131 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

MODULATION/DELAY module

Type Parameter
DEPTH RATE MIX
CHORUS
Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound.
DEPTH RATE FB LFO SFT
FLANGER
Produces a unique, undulating sound.
RATE COLOR LFO SFT
PHASER
Produces a swooshing sound.
DEPTH RATE CLIP
TREMOLO
Periodically varies the level of the sound.
WIDTH RATE CLIP
AUTO PAN
Pereodically moves the stereo position of the sound.
SHIFT TONE BALANCE
PITCH
Modifies the pitch of the direct sound.
RATE BALANCE
RING MOD
Produces a metallic sound.
TIME FB MIX
DELAY
Delay effect with a delay time of up to 1.4 seconds.
TIME FB MIX
ECHO
Delay effect with warm sound, up to 1.4 second delay time.
TIME TONE MIX
DOUBLING
Doubling effect with a delay time of up to 100 milliseconds.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
DEPTH 0 – 10 Adjusts the depth of the effect.
TREMOLO: 1 - 30, t0 - t9, M1
FLANGER, PHASER, Adjusts the speed of the effect. The "tx" or "Mx" setting results in sync with the
RATE rhythm tempo.
AUTO PAN: 1 - 30, t0 - t9, M1 - M4
Others: 1 – 30
MIX 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect.
FLANGER: -10 – 10
FB Adjusts the amount of feedback.
DELAY, ECHO: 0 – 10
LFO SFT 0 – 180 Adjusts the phase difference between L/R.
COLOR 1–4 Specifies the type of phase tone.
CLIP 0 – 10 Emphasizes the effect.
WIDTH 0 – 10 Adjusts the width between L/R.
SHIFT -24.0 – 12.0 Adjust the pitch shift amount. The “dt” setting results in a detune effect.
TONE 0 – 10 Adjusts the tone.
BALANCE 0 – 30 Adjusts the balance between the direct sound and effect sound.
DOUBLING: 1 – 100 Adjusts the delay time in 1-ms steps. The "tx" or "M1" setting results in sync with
TIME the rhythm tempo.
DELAY, ECHO: 1 – 1400, t1 – t9, M1

ZNR module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

■ DUAL MIC algorithm

COMP/LIM module
MIC PRE module
3 BAND EQ module
See the MIC algorithm.
(Same with the MIC algorithm except that there is not the parameter “DE-ESSER” in MIC PRE module)

ZOOM MRS-8 131

MRS-8(E).book 132 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

DOUBLING module

Type Parameter
TIME TONE MIX
DOUBLE L/R
Doubling effect with a delay time of up to 100 milliseconds.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
TIME 1 – 100 Adjusts the delay time in 1-ms steps.
MIX 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect.
TONE 0 – 10 Adjusts the tone.

ZNR module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

■ MASTERING algorithm
3 BAND COMP/Lo-Fi module

Type Parameter
XOVER LO XOVER HI SENS HI SENS MID SENS LOW MIX HIGH MIX MID MIX LOW
MLT CMP
Divides the signal into three frequency bands, and specifies the compression and the mix amount each.
CHARACTR COLOR DISTORTN TONE EFX LVL DRY LVL
Lo-Fi
Degrades the audio quality of the sound.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
XOVER LO 50 – 16000 Adjusts the frequency for bass/midrange division.
XOVER HI 50 – 16000 Adjusts the frequency for midrange/treble division.
SENS HI 0 – 24 Adjusts the compressor input sensitivity for the treble range.
SENS MID 0 – 24 Adjusts the compressor input sensitivity for the midrange.
SENS LOW 0 – 24 Adjusts the compressor input sensitivity for the bass range.
MIX HIGH OFF, -24 – 6 Adjusts the treble mix amount.
MIX MID OFF, -24 – 6 Adjusts the midrange mix amount.
MIX LOW OFF, -24 – 6 Adjusts the bass mix amount.
CHARA 0 – 10 Specifies the character of the filter.
COLOR 1 – 10 Adjusts the color.
DIST 0 – 10 Adjusts the degree of distortion.
TONE 0 – 10 Adjusts the tone.
EFX LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound.
DRY LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the direct sound.

NORMALIZER module

Type Parameter
GAIN
NORMLZR
Set the input level of the 3 BAND COMP/Lo-Fi module.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
GAIN -12 – 12 Adjusts the level.

3 BAND EQ module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

132 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 133 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

DIMENSION/RESONANCE module

Type Parameter
RISE 1 RISE 2
DIMENSN
Produces spatial width.
DEPTH FreqOFST RATE TYPE RESONANC EFX LVL DRY LVL
RESONNC
A resonance filter with LFO.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
RISE 1 0 – 30 Adjusts the emphasizing degree of the stereo component.
RISE 2 0 – 30 Adjusts the spaciousness that includes the monaural component.
DEPTH 0 – 10 Adjusts the depth of the effect.
FreqOFST 1 – 30 Adjusts the LFO offset.
1 – 30, t0 – t9, M1 – M4 Adjusts the speed of the effect. The "tx" or "Mx" setting results in sync with the
RATE rhythm tempo.
TYPE HPF, LPF, bPF Specifies the filter type.
RESONANC 1 – 30 Adjusts the effect character intensity.
EFX LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound.
DRY LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the direct sound.

ZNR module
See the CLEAN, DIST, ACO/BASS SIM, BASS algorithm.

Send/return Effect
CHORUS/DELAY module

Type Parameter
LFO TYPE DEPTH RATE PRE DLY EFX LVL
CHORUS
Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound.
TIME FB DAMP PAN EFX LVL
DELAY
Delay effect with a delay time of up to 2.9 seconds.
PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW E/R MIX EFX LVL
HALL
Simulates the acoustics of a concert hall.
PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW E/R MIX EFX LVL
ROOM
Simulates the acoustics of a room.
PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW EFX LVL
SPRING
Simulates a spring type reverb machine.
PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW EFX LVL
PLATE
Simulates a plate reverb.

Parameter description
Parameter Setting range Description
LFO TYPE Mn, St Selects the LFO phase: Mn (mono) or St (stereo).
DEPTH 0 – 10 Adjusts the depth of the effect.
RATE 1 – 30 Adjusts the speed of the effect.
CHORUS: 1 - 30
PRE DLY Adjusts the pre-delay time.
HALL, ROOM, SPRING, PLATE: 1 – 100
EFX LVL 0 – 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound.
1 - 2900, t1 – t9, M1 Adjusts the delay time in 1-ms steps. The "tx" or "M1" setting results in sync with
TIME the rhythm tempo.
FB 0 – 10 Adjusts the amount of feedback.
DAMP 0 – 10 Adjusts the cut amount of the delay sound's high range.
PAN L10 – L1, 0, r1 – r10 Adjusts the stereo position of the delay sound.
DECAY 1 – 30 Adjusts the reverb time.
EQ HIGH -12 – 6 Adjusts the high range level of the effect sound.
EQ LOW -12 – 6 Adjusts the low range level of the effect sound.
E/R MIX 0 – 30 Adjusts the volume of early reflections.

ZOOM MRS-8 133

MRS-8(E).book 134 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Effect Patch

Insert Effect
■ CLEAN algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 Standard Basic sound touched up for recording
1 J-Chorus JC clean sound
2 Phaser Emulates a vintage phase effect
3 DryComp Line input clean sound with a hint of doubling
4 RiffCLN Rock'n roll sound bringing out differences between guitars
5 WideCLN Wide clean sound with crunch
6 PunchCLN Airy sound with a punch
7 Arpeggio Clean sound for arpeggios
8 CleanCH Clean channel sound of an American-made vintage tube amp
9 50sRNB Tremolo sound for rhythm & blues
10 StrmBeat Basic sound for strummed backing
11 CompCln Natural compression sound
12 12-Clean Clean sound with an upper octave mixed in
13 Funky Funky cutting sound
14 FDR-Cln Clean sound of American-made vintage tube amp
15 Rockbily Rockabilly sound with short delay
16 NYFusion Clean sound for direct-line recording
17 Wet-Rhy Cutting sound for ballads
18 JazzTone Clean sound for jazz
19 DeepFLG Clean flanging sound
20 ArrmWah Clean wah sound using FIX-WAH
21 Kaitei Mellow echoed sound for arpeggios or lead
22 - 29 EMPTY

■ DIST algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 MRS-Drv Full distortion with rich sustain
1 RCT-BG High-gain amp sound of American-made “Rectifier” series
2 CrnchCmp Crunch sound with a touch of compression
3 9002Lead ZOOM 9002 sound
4 F-Tweed Sound of a small, American-made vintage tube amp
5 BlackPnl Heavy metal sound of “5100 series” American-made stack amp
6 MatchCru Crunch sound of a modern class-A amp
7 Sticky Tight crunch sound
8 HardPick Hard crunch sound
9 RockDrv Straight rock drive sound
10 Duplex Spacious lead sound with dual overlay effect
11 MadBass Distortion bass sound for high range chord playing and lead
12 Straight Versatile, straight lead sound
13 JetSound Versatile jet sound
14 Combo-BG Overdrive sound with detailed long sustain
15 FDR-Twin Clean sound of American-made vintage tube amp
16 Beatle Class-A type Mersey Beat sound
17 WildFuzz Vintage fuzz box
18 JB.Style Octaver for guitar and bass unison riffs

134 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 135 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

19 Pitch-5 Even single notes sound like power chords

20 BRT-Drv Great sound of British “900 series” stack amp
21 Soldan High-gain amp sound for single coil half-tone settings
22 MatchDrv Drive sound of a modern class-A amp
23 Snake Heavy metal sound with a solid bottom
24 Crunch Ensemble of “800” series crunch and delay
25 Ballad Warm lead sound
26 Metal-X Metal sound with subtle overtones
27 DP-Drv 1970's hard rock sound
28 WetDrive Simple wet overdrive sound
29 Mellow Lead sound with a sweet tone
30 MultiDst Strong all-round sound
31 Bright Crisp sound
32 Melody Tastefully seasoned sound for melodies
33 V-Blues Vintage blues sound
34 BlueFngr Bluesy sound for finger picking
35 HDR-Drv Wet hard rock sound
36 Cry-Lead Zoom's original “cry effect” sound
37 ZakWah Lead sound with auto-wah
38 LA-Std L.A. studio-style big chorus sound
39 TheRing Ring modulator simulation
40 JimVib Remade famous vibrato
41 Creamy Mild fuzz
42 - 49 EMPTY

■ ACO/BASS SIM algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 AcoSIM 1 Simulates unadorned acoustic guitar sound
1 AcoSIM 2 Simulates acoustic guitar with beautiful chorus
2 AcoSIM 3 Shimmering detuned sound with no modulation
3 FullSize Simulates acoustic guitar with full-sized body
4 Light12 Light 12-string guitar sound
5 BsSIM 1 Simulates a tight picked bass
6 BsSIM 2 Chorus bass simulation for melody lines
7 BsSIM 3 Auto-wah bass simulation
8 FlngBass Flanging sound often used in 1980's fusion
9 UniSolo Guitar and bass unison sound
10 - 19 EMPTY

■ BASS algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 BS-Pick Tight sound for playing with a pick
1 BS-Od Retro distortion sound
2 BS-Drv Hard distortion sound
3 BS-Fingr All-round sound for finger picking
4 BS-Slap Crisp slap sound
5 BS-Comp Sound with attack, controlled by picking dynamics
6 BS-Edge Tight sound with an edge
7 BS-Solo Chorus sound for melodies
8 BS-Octve Sound with an upper octave mixed in
9 BS-Wah Funky bass with auto-wah
10 - 19 EMPTY

ZOOM MRS-8 135

MRS-8(E).book 136 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

■ MIC algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 Vo-Stnd Standard vocal effect
1 Vo-Rock Rock vocal effect
2 Vo-Balld Ballade vocal effect with detuned chorus
3 Vo-Echo Vocal echo
4 Vo-PreC1 Smooth, listenable sound for condenser mics
5 Vo-PreC2 Adds depth for condenser mics
6 Vo-PreD1 Improves definition for dynamic mics
7 Vo-PreD2 Makes sound fatter and wetter
8 Vo-Robot Robot voice as in SF movies
9 AG-Live Sound for mic recording with a live feel, not only for guitar
10 AG-Brght Bright and crisp sound for mic recording
11 AG-Solo Gorgeous solo sound
12 AG-Edge Acoustic guitar recording sound with enhanced edge
13 AG-Strum Acoustic guitar recording sound for strumming
14 ForWind Sound with distinctive mid-range
15 ForBrass Crisp-sounding short delay
16 ForPiano Enhances depth and definition
17 AG-Mix 1 Enhanced sound for strumming
18 AG-Mix 2 Enhanced sound for arpeggio
19 SweeperX Adds sharp sweep to one-shot percussion
20 FXgroove Rhythm machine sound
21 Lo&Hi Boosts highs and lows and attenuates midrange
22 Lo-Boost Emphasizes low end by pitch shifter
23 FanFan Sound like talking into a fan
24 Alien Space creature sound for vocal
25 TapeComp Simulates analog multi-track recording
26 Duet?? Adds a child voice to female vocal or a female voice to male vocal
27 Active Emphasizes attack
28 Psyche Vocal gimmick effect in psychedelic style
29 DeepDLY Delay for vocals, useful when cutting shouts or sound
30 HeGas Duck voice after inhaling helium gas
31 - 49 EMPTY

■ LINE algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 Syn-Lead For synthesizer single note lead
1 OrganPha Phaser for synthesizer/organ
2 OrgaRock Boomy distortion for rock organ
3 EP-Chor Beautiful chorus for electric piano
4 ClavFlg Wah for clavinet
5 Concert Concert hall effect for piano
6 Honkey Honky-tonk piano simulation
7 PowerBD Gives a bass drum more power
8 DrumFlng Conventional flanger for drum
9 LiveDrum Simulates outdoor live doubling
10 JetDrum Phaser for 16-beat hi-hat
11 AsianKit Changes a standard kit to an Asian kit
12 BassBost Emphasizes low range
13 Mono->St Gives spaciousness to a monaural source
14 AM Radio AM radio simulation
15 WideDrm Wide stereo effect for internal drums
16 DanceDrm Reinforces bass for dance rhythms
17 Octaver Adds one-octave lower sound
18 Percushn Gives air, presence, and stereo spread to percussion

136 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 137 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

19 MoreTone Distortion with emphasized midrange body

20 SnrSmack Emphasizes snappy snare sound
21 Shudder! Sliced sound for techno tracks
22 SwpPhase Phaser with powerful resonance
23 DirtyBiz Lo-fi distortion using ring modulator
24 Doubler Doubling for vocal track
25 SFXlab Forced SFX sound for synthesizer
26 SynLead2 Old-style jet sound for synthesizer lead
27 Tekepiko For sequence phrases or single note muted guitar
28 Soliner Simulates analog strings ensemble
29 HevyDrum For hard rock drums
30 - 49 EMPTY

■ DUAL MIC algorithm

No. Name Comment Recommended L/R input

0 Vo/Vo 1 For duets Vocals
1 Vo/Vo 2 Chorus for main vocal Vocals
2 Vo/Vo 3 For harmony Vocals
3 AG/Vo 1 Creates a street-like character Acoustic guitar/Vocal
4 AG/Vo 2 Different from AG/Vo 1 in vocal character Acoustic guitar/Vocal
5 AG/Vo 3 Aggressively modifies vocal character Acoustic guitar/Vocal
6 ShortDLY Short delay sound with effective doubling Microphones
7 FatDrum For drum recording with single point stereo mic Microphones
8 BothTone Tuned for male on L channel and female on R channel Vocals
9 Condnser Simulates condenser mic sound with dynamic mic input Vocals
10 DuoAtack Chorus for lead vocals with emphasized attack Vocals
11 Warmth Warm sound with prominent midrange Vocals
12 AM Radio Simulates AM monaural radio Vocals
13 Pavilion Narration sound at expo booths Vocals
14 TV News TV newscaster sound Vocals
15 F-Vo/Pf1 For female vocal piano ballads Vocal/Piano
16 JazzDuo1 Simulates jazz session LP with lo-fi sound Vocal/Piano
17 Cntmprry All-round clear sound Vocal/Piano
18 JazzDuo2 JazzDuo 1 for male vocal Vocal/Piano
19 Ensemble For guitar with strong attack and mellow piano Acoustic guitar/Piano
20 Enhanced Enhances clear, strong outline for ballads Acoustic guitar/Vocal
21 Warmy Moderates overbright ambience Acoustic guitar/Vocal
22 Strum+Vo Smooth fat sound with midrange compensation Acoustic guitar/Vocal
23 FatPlus Spruces up a thin midrange Acoustic guitar/Vocal
24 Arp+Vo Overall solid sound Acoustic guitar/Vocal
25 ClubDuo Simulates live sound in small club Acoustic guitars
26 BigShape Enhances overall clarity Acoustic guitars
27 FolkDuo Fresh and clean sound Acoustic guitars
28 GtrDuo Suitable for guitar duos Acoustic guitars
29 Bright Bright and sharp outlook Acoustic guitars
30 - 49 EMPTY

ZOOM MRS-8 137

MRS-8(E).book 138 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

■ MASTERING algorithm

No. Name Comment

0 PlusAlfa Enhances the overall power
1 All-Pops Conventional mastering
2 StWide wide-range mastering
3 DiscoMst For club sound
4 Boost For hi-fi finish
5 Power Powerful low range
6 Live Adds a live feel
7 WarmMst Adds a warm feeling
8 TightUp Adds a hard feeling
9 1930Mst Mastering with 1930's sound
10 LoFi Mst Lo-fi mastering
11 BGM Mastering for background music
12 RockShow Makes a rock style mix live
13 Exciter Lo-fi mastering with slight distortion in mid and upper range
14 Clarify Emphasizes high-end range
15 VocalMax Brings vocals to the foreground
16 RaveRez Special sweep effect using sharp filter
17 FullComp Strong compression over full frequency range
18 ClearPWR Power tuning with emphasized midrange
19 ClearDMS Enhances clarity and spaciousness
20 Maximizr Boosts overall sound pressure level
21 - 29 EMPTY

138 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 139 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Send/return Effect

No. Name Comment

0 VoChorus Chorus adding color to vocals
1 DeepDBL Deep doubling
2 TightHal Hall reverb with a hard tonal quality
3 LargeHal Simulates the reverberation of a large hall
4 TrStudio Simulates the reverberation of a rehearsal studio
5 VcxRev Tuned to enhance vocals
6 RealPlat Spring reverb simulation
7 VinSprin Simulates analog spring reverb
8 Delay3/4 Dotted-8th-note delay in sync with rhythm tempo
9 Natural Chorus with low modulation for backing
10 GtChorus Chorus for weak guitar sound
11 Doubling Versatile doubling
12 Echo Showy analog-style delay
13 Delay3/2 Dotted-quarter-note delay in sync with rhythm tempo
14 FastCho Fast-rated chorus
15 DeepCho Versatile deep chorus
16 ShortDLY Versatile short delay
17 SoloLead Keeps fast phrases tight
18 WarmyDly Simulates warm analog delay
19 EnhanCho Enhancer using phase shift doubling
20 Detune For instruments with strong harmonics such as electronic piano or synthesizer
21 Whole*1 Whole-note delay in sync with rhythm tempo
22 Delay2/3 Half-triplet-note delay in sync with rhythm tempo
23 Delay1/4 16th-note delay in sync with rhythm tempo
24 BrgtRoom Room reverb with a hard tonal quality
25 SoftHall Hall reverb with a mild tonal quality
26 SmallHal Simulates the reverberation of a small hall
27 LiveHous Simulates the reverberation of a club
28 DarkRoom Room reverb with a mild tonal quality
29 Tunnel Simulates the reverberation of a tunnel
30 BigRoom Simulates the reverberation of a gym
31 PowerSt. Gate reverb
32 BrgtHall Simulates the bright reverb of a concert hall
33 BudoKan Simulates the reverberation at Budokan in Tokyo
34 Ballade For slow ballads
35 SecBrass Reverb for brass section
36 ShortPlt Short reverb
37 Dome Reverb of a Domed-stadium
38 ClearSpr Clear reverb with short reverb time
39 Dokan Simulates the reverberation of a clay pipe
40 - 59 EMPTY

ZOOM MRS-8 139

MRS-8(E).book 140 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

Rhythm Pattern

In “Song” columns (No. 35-234), verses and fill-ins are gathered up on a style basis to make a rhythm song efficiently with
FAST.
For example, when you enter (71+72+73)x2+(74+75+76)x2, 16-measure fusion rhythm part is completed. ("V" of a
pattern name means verse, and "F" does fill-in.)

No. Name Measure 47 ROCKs3VA 1 99 POPs1Vb 1 151 DANCs1VB 1

Variation 48 ROCKs3FA 1 100 POPs1FB 1 152 DANCs1FB 1
0 08Beat01 4 49 ROCKs3VB 1 101 RnBs1VA 2 153 DANCs2VA 2
1 08Beat02 4 50 ROCKs3FB 1 102 RnBs1Va 1 154 DANCs2Va 1
2 08Beat03 4 51 ROCKs4VA 2 103 RnBs1FA 1 155 DANCs2FA 1
3 08Beat04 4 52 ROCKs4Va 1 104 RnBs1VB 2 156 DANCs2VB 2
4 08Beat05 4 53 ROCKs4FA 1 105 RnBs1Vb 1 157 DANCs2Vb 1
5 08Beat06 4 54 ROCKs4VB 2 106 RnBs1FB 1 158 DANCs2FB 1
6 08Beat07 4 55 ROCKs4Vb 1 107 RnBs2VA 2 159 HOUSs1VA 1
7 08Beat08 4 56 ROCKs4FB 1 108 RnBs2Va 1 160 HOUSs1FA 1
8 08Beat09 4 57 HRKs1VA 1 109 RnBs2FA 1 161 HOUSs1VB 1
9 08Beat10 4 58 HRKs1FA 1 110 RnBs2VB 2 162 HOUSs1FB 1
10 08Beat11 4 59 HRKs1VB 1 111 RnBs2Vb 1 163 TECHs1VA 1
11 08Beat12 4 60 HRKs1FB 1 112 RnBs2FB 1 164 TECHs1FA 1
12 16Beat01 4 61 HRKs2VA 2 113 MTNs1VA 2 165 TECHs1VB 1
13 16Beat02 2 62 HRKs2Va 1 114 MTNs1Va 1 166 TECHs1FB 1
14 16Beat03 4 63 HRKs2FA 1 115 MTNs1FA 1 167 DnBs1VA 2
15 16Beat04 4 64 HRKs2VB 2 116 MTNs1VB 2 168 DnBs1Va 1
16 16Beat05 4 65 HRKs2Vb 1 117 MTNs1Vb 1 169 DnBs1FA 1
17 16Beat06 4 66 HRKs2FB 1 118 MTNs1FB 1 170 DnBs1VB 2
18 16Beat07 2 67 MTLs1VA 1 119 FUNKs1VA 2 171 DnBs1Vb 1
19 16Beat08 2 68 MTLs1FA 1 120 FUNKs1Va 1 172 DnBs1FB 1
20 16Beat09 4 69 MTLs1VB 1 121 FUNKs1FA 1 173 TPs1VA 1
21 16Beat10 4 70 MTLs1FB 1 122 FUNKs1VB 2 174 TPs1FA 1
22 16Beat11 4 71 FUSs1VA 2 123 FUNKs1Vb 1 175 TPs1VB 1
23 16Beat12 4 72 FUSs1Va 1 124 FUNKs1FB 1 176 TPs1FB 1
24 16FUS01 2 73 FUSs1FA 1 125 FUNKs2VA 2 177 AMBs1VA 2
25 16FUS02 2 74 FUSs1VB 2 126 FUNKs2Va 1 178 AMBs1Va 1
26 16FUS03 4 75 FUSs1Vb 1 127 FUNKs2FA 1 179 AMBs1FA 1
27 16FUS04 2 76 FUSs1FB 1 128 FUNKs2VB 2 180 AMBs1FB 1
28 04JAZZ01 4 77 FUSs2VA 2 129 FUNKs2Vb 1 181 BALDs1VA 2
29 04JAZZ02 4 78 FUSs2Va 1 130 FUNKs2FB 1 182 BALDs1Va 1
30 04JAZZ03 4 79 FUSs2FA 1 131 HIPs1VA 2 183 BALDs1FA 1
31 04JAZZ04 4 80 FUSs2VB 2 132 HIPs1Va 1 184 BALDs1VB 2
32 DANCE 2 81 FUSs2Vb 1 133 HIPs1FA 1 185 BALDs1Vb 1
33 CNTRY 2 82 FUSs2FB 1 134 HIPs1VB 2 186 BALDs1FB 1
34 68BLUS 4 83 FUSs3VA 2 135 HIPs1Vb 1 187 BLUSs1VA 2
No. Name Measure 84 FUSs3Va 1 136 HIPs1FB 1 188 BLUSs1Va 1
Song 85 FUSs3FA 1 137 HIPs1VC 2 189 BLUSs1FA 1
35 ROCKs1VA 2 86 FUSs3VB 2 138 HIPs1Vc 1 190 BLUSs1VB 2
36 ROCKs1Va 1 87 FUSs3Vb 1 139 HIPs1VD 2 191 BLUSs1Vb 1
37 ROCKs1FA 1 88 FUSs3FB 1 140 HIPs1Vd 1 192 BLUSs1FB 1
38 ROCKs1VB 2 89 INDTs1VA 2 141 HIPs2VA 2 193 CNTRs1VA 2
39 ROCKs1Vb 1 90 INDTs1Va 1 142 HIPs2Va 1 194 CNTRs1Va 1
40 ROCKs1FB 1 91 INDTs1FA 1 143 HIPs2VB 2 195 CNTRs1FA 1
41 ROCKs2VA 2 92 INDTs1VB 2 144 HIPs2Vb 1 196 CNTRs1VB 2
42 ROCKs2Va 1 93 INDTs1Vb 1 145 HIPs2FB 1 197 CNTRs1Vb 1
43 ROCKs2FA 1 94 INDTs1FB 2 146 HIPs2VC 2 198 CNTRs1FB 1
44 ROCKs2VB 2 95 POPs1VA 2 147 HIPs2Vc 1 199 JAZZs1VA 2
45 ROCKs2Vb 1 96 POPs1Va 1 148 HIPs2VD 2 200 JAZZs1Va 1
46 ROCKs2FB 1 97 POPs1FA 1 149 DANCs1VA 1 201 JAZZs1FA 1
98 POPs1VB 2 150 DANCs1FA 1 202 JAZZs1VB 2

140 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 141 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

203 JAZZs1Vb 1 265 HRK03 2 329 HIP10 2 393 BLUS06 2

204 JAZZs1FB 1 266 HRK04 2 330 HIP11 2 394 CNTR01 2
205 AFROs1VA 2 267 HRK05 2 331 HIP12 2 395 CNTR02 2
206 AFROs1Va 1 268 HRK06 2 332 HIP13 2 396 CNTR03 2
207 AFROs1FA 1 269 HRK07 2 333 HIP14 2 397 CNTR04 2
208 AFROs1VB 2 270 MTL01 2 334 HIP15 2 398 JAZZ01 2
209 AFROs1Vb 1 271 MTL02 2 335 HIP16 2 399 JAZZ02 2
210 AFROs1FB 1 272 MTL03 2 336 HIP17 2 400 JAZZ03 2
211 REGGs1VA 2 273 MTL04 2 337 HIP18 2 401 JAZZ04 2
212 REGGs1Va 1 274 THRS01 2 338 HIP19 2 402 JAZZ05 2
213 REGGs1FA 1 275 THRS02 2 339 HIP20 2 403 JAZZ06 2
214 REGGs1VB 2 276 PUNK01 2 340 HIP21 2 404 JAZZ07 4
215 REGGs1Vb 1 277 PUNK02 2 341 HIP22 2 405 SHFL01 2
216 REGGs1FB 1 278 FUS01 2 342 HIP23 2 406 SHFL02 2
217 LATNs1VA 2 279 FUS02 2 343 DANC01 2 407 SHFL03 2
218 LATNs1Va 1 280 FUS03 2 344 DANC02 2 408 SHFL04 2
219 LATNs1FA 1 281 FUS04 2 345 DANC03 2 409 SHFL05 2
220 LATNs1VB 2 282 FUS05 2 346 DANC04 2 410 SKA01 2
221 LATNs1Vb 1 283 FUS06 2 347 DANC05 2 411 SKA02 2
222 LATNs1FB 1 284 FUS07 2 348 DANC06 2 412 SKA03 2
223 LATNs2VA 2 285 FUS08 2 349 HOUS01 2 413 SKA04 2
224 LATNs2Va 1 286 POP01 2 350 HOUS02 2 414 REGG01 2
225 LATNs2FA 1 287 POP02 2 351 HOUS03 2 415 REGG02 2
226 LATNs2VB 2 288 POP03 2 352 HOUS04 2 416 REGG03 2
227 LATNs2Vb 1 289 POP04 2 353 TECH01 2 417 REGG04 2
228 LATNs2FB 1 290 POP05 2 354 TECH02 2 418 AFRO01 2
229 MidEs1VA 2 291 POP06 2 355 TECH03 2 419 AFRO02 2
230 MidEs1Va 1 292 POP07 2 356 TECH04 2 420 AFRO03 2
231 MidEs1FA 1 293 POP08 2 357 TECH05 2 421 AFRO04 2
232 MidEs1VB 2 294 POP09 2 358 TECH06 2 422 AFRO05 2
233 MidEs1Vb 1 295 POP10 2 359 TECH07 2 423 AFRO06 2
234 MidEs1FB 1 296 POP11 2 360 TECH08 2 424 AFRO07 2
No. Name Measure 297 POP12 2 361 TECH09 2 425 AFRO08 2
Standard 298 RnB01 2 362 TECH10 2 426 LATN01 2
235 ROCK01 2 299 RnB02 2 363 DnB01 2 427 LATN02 2
236 ROCK02 2 300 RnB03 2 364 DnB02 2 428 LATN03 2
237 ROCK03 2 301 RnB04 2 365 DnB03 2 429 LATN04 2
238 ROCK04 2 302 RnB05 2 366 DnB04 2 430 LATN05 2
239 ROCK05 2 303 RnB06 2 367 DnB05 2 431 LATN06 2
240 ROCK06 2 304 RnB07 2 368 DnB06 2 432 LATN07 2
241 ROCK07 2 305 RnB08 2 369 TRIP01 2 433 LATN08 2
242 ROCK08 2 306 RnB09 2 370 TRIP02 2 434 LATN09 2
243 ROCK09 2 307 RnB10 2 371 TRIP03 2 435 LATN10 2
244 ROCK10 2 308 FUNK01 2 372 TRIP04 2 436 LATN11 2
245 ROCK11 4 309 FUNK02 2 373 AMB01 2 437 LATN12 2
246 ROCK12 2 310 FUNK03 2 374 AMB02 2 438 BOSSA01 4
247 ROCK13 2 311 FUNK04 2 375 AMB03 2 439 BOSSA02 4
248 ROCK14 2 312 FUNK05 2 376 AMB04 2 440 SAMBA01 4
249 ROCK15 2 313 FUNK06 2 377 BALD01 2 441 SAMBA02 4
250 ROCK16 2 314 FUNK07 2 378 BALD02 2 442 MidE01 2
251 ROCK17 2 315 FUNK08 2 379 BALD03 2 443 MidE02 2
252 ROCK18 2 316 FUNK09 2 380 BALD04 2 444 MidE03 2
253 ROCK19 2 317 FUNK10 2 381 BALD05 2 445 MidE04 2
254 ROCK20 2 318 FUNK11 2 382 BALD06 2 446 INTRO01 1
255 ROCK21 2 319 FUNK12 2 383 BALD07 2 447 INTRO02 1
256 ROCK22 2 320 HIP01 2 384 BALD08 2 448 INTRO03 1
257 ROCK23 2 321 HIP02 2 385 BALD09 2 449 INTRO04 1
258 ROCK24 2 322 HIP03 2 386 BALD10 2 450 INTRO05 1
259 ROCK25 2 323 HIP04 2 387 BALD11 4 451 INTRO06 1
260 ROCK26 2 324 HIP05 2 388 BLUS01 2 452 INTRO07 1
261 ROCK27 2 325 HIP06 2 389 BLUS02 2 453 INTRO08 1
262 ROCK28 2 326 HIP07 2 390 BLUS03 2 454 INTRO09 1
263 HRK01 2 327 HIP08 2 391 BLUS04 2 455 INTRO10 1
264 HRK02 2 328 HIP09 2 392 BLUS05 2 456 INTRO11 1

ZOOM MRS-8 141

MRS-8(E).book 142 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

457 INTRO12 1 463 INTRO18 1 469 ENDING06 1 473

458 INTRO13 1 464 ENDING01 1 470 ENDING07 1 I EMPTY 0
508
459 INTRO14 1 465 ENDING02 1 471 COUNT 2
509 METRO34 1
460 INTRO15 1 466 ENDING03 1 472 AllMute 1
510 METRO44 1
461 INTRO16 1 467 ENDING04 1
462 INTRO17 1 468 ENDING05 1

Drum Kits/Bass Programs

Drum Kit Bass Program

No. Name No. Name
0 Standard 0 Finger
1 Basic 1 Pick
2 LiveRock 2 Slap
3 Analog 3 Acoustic
4 Light 4 SynthBS
5 Brush
6 Funk
7 Pop

Instrument/MIDI note number chart

Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3

Pad
Instrument Note# Instrument Note# Instrument Note#
BD Kick drum 36 Rim shot 37 Low agogo 68
SD Snare drum 38 Clap 39 High agogo 67
CHH Closed hi-hat 42 Cowbell 56 Stick 33
CRASH Crash cymbal 49 Low conga 64 High bongo 60
RIDE Ride cymbal 51 Mute high conga 62 Low bongo 61
OHH Open hi-hat 46 Open high conga 63 Metronome bell 34
TOM1 Tom 1 50 Cup 53 Maracas 70
TOM2 Tom 2 47 Tambourine 54 High timbale 65
TOM3 Tom 3 43 Claves 52 Low timbale 66

Files on SD card

■ PROJxxx folder
(xxx; 000-999 corresponding to project number)
Contains various data for each project.

PRJDATA.ZIF
Settings for marker, track parameter, effect

RHYTHM.SEQ
Rhythm pattern/rhythm song data

142 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 143 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

TRACKx_y.ZAF
Audio data for each track/V-take
(x; 0-7 corresponding to track number 1-8, y; 0-9 to V-take number 1-10)

■ SYS folder
Contains the system-related files.

MACPRM.ZIF
Number of most recently edited project

SEQPLY.LST
Play list data

■ SYSTEM.BIN
Common settings between projects on the card

* Do not change the file names using a conventional SD card reader/writer. If the files have different names,
they will not be recognized on the MRS-8.

MIDI implementation

1. Recognized Messages

None.

2. Transmitted Messages

Status 1st 2nd Description

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8nH kk 40H Note Off kk: note number
9nH kk 00H Note Off kk: note number
9nH kk vv Note On kk: note number
vv: velocity
BnH 07H vv Channel Volume vv: volume value
BnH 7BH 00H All Notes Off
F1H dd MTC Quarter Frame dd: data
F2H sl sh Song Position Pointer shsl: song position
F8H Timing Clock
FAH Start
FBH Continue
FCH Stop

NOTE: n = MIDI Channel Number ( 0 - F )

3. System Exclusive Messages

No SysEx messages are recognized/transmitted.

ZOOM MRS-8 143

MRS-8(E).book 144 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

Appendix

MIDI implementation chart

[SD card Recorder] Date : 30 Jun. 2004

Model MRS-8 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.00

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function ...

Basic Default 1-16,OFF Memorized

Channel Changed 1-16,OFF

Default 3
Mode Messages x
Altered ******************

Note 12-75
Number True voice ******************

Velocity Note ON o
Note OFF x

After Key's x
Touch Ch's x

Pitch Bend x

7 Volume
Control

Change

Prog o
Change True # ******************

System Exclusive x

Qtr Frame o
System Song Pos o
Song Sel x
Common Tune x

System Clock o
Real Time Commands o

Aux Local ON/OFF x

All Notes OFF o
Mes- Active Sense x
sages Reset x

Notes MTC quarter frame message is transmitted.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO x : No

144 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 145 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

INDEX
■ Symbols and numerals DrKIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
( ...................................... 79 Drum kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 142
) ...................................... 79 MIDI channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
+ ..................................... 79 Switching the drum kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
X ..................................... 79 Drum sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
← PTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Drum track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 55
DrVOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
■A
A-B repeat function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ■E
Auto punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Effect module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Effect parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 125
Effect patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 134
■B Effect related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Bass program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 142
Effect section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MIDI channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Bass sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Importing from another project . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 59
Bass track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 55
Erase
Battery insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Bass sequence play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Bounce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Drum sequence play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BsPRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
BsVOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Rhythm song events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Specified data range (track editing) . . . . . . . . . 47
■C V-take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 EV→ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chord information Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ■F
CHORD Fade-in/out
Entering chord information (rhythm song) . . . . 81 Specified range of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Chromatic tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Fader section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 FAST input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Control Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Copy
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
■I
Import
Rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Patch from another project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Specified data range (rhythm song) . . . . . . . . . 85 Rhythm pattern/rhythm song from another
Specified data range (track editing) . . . . . . . . . 45 project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
V-take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 V-take from another project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
In point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Input section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
■D Input sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 25
Delete
Insert effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
Before/after specified range (track editing) . . . . 47
Applying the insert effect to the monitor
Rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
signal only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Assigning a name to a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Display section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Changing the insert point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Contrast/backlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ZOOM MRS-8 145

MRS-8(E).book 146 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

INDEX

Editing a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 ■O
Selecting a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Org Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Saving/swapping a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 OrgChord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Out point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inverting a specified range of data
Overdubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
(track editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overdubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

■L
Level meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
■P
Pad bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Locate function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pad
Changing the pad sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
■M Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27, 90
Major / Minor Patch
Entering chord information in a rhythm Insert effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Send/return effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Selecting the scale for pad playing . . . . . . . . . . 65 Play list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Manual punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Playback related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Marker function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Deleting a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Pre-count
Moving a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Changing the duration (rhythm section) . . . . . . 89
Setting a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting pre-count operation (recorder) . . . . . 43
Master track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 30, 38 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mixdown to master track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mastering effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Manual punch-in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Changing MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Control Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ■Q
Drum/bass MIDI channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 70
MIDI Time Code (MTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Song Position Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
■R
Start/Stop/Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Timing Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Real-time input
MIDI channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Bass sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
MIDI implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Drum sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
MIDI implementation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MIDI OUT connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 32
MIDI/synchronization related problems . . . . . 121
Recording level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 22
Mixdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 39
Recording related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 55
Recording
Move
Let's record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Moving a specified range of data . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Mixdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Moving a V-take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Overdubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Recording the first track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
■N Repeat playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Note On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 140
Adjusting the drum/bass sequence volume . . . 74
Assigning a name to a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . 75
Copying a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Entering chord information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

146 ZOOM MRS-8

MRS-8(E).book 147 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

INDEX

Erasing a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 ■T

Real-time input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69 Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Selecting a rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Tempo
Step input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71 Changing the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 63
Rhythm pattern mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Tempo information (rhythm song) . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Rhythm recording function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Tick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rhythm related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Timing Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Rhythm section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 10, 61 Timsig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing the metronome volume . . . . . . . . . . 89 Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Changing the pad sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Track editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing the pre-count duration . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Track parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Displaying remaining memory capacity . . . . . . 90
Transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Assigning a name to a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . 87
Tuner function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Copying a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Using the chromatic tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Copying a specified measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Using other tuner types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Deleting a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Entering chord information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ■V
Entering other information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 V-take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Entering pattern information with FAST input . . 79
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Entering pattern information with step input . . 77
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Importing from another project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Importing from another project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting a rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Transposing the entire rhythm song . . . . . . . . . 85
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rhythm song mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ROOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Volume adjustment
■S Drum/bass sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SD card Pre-count (recorder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pre-count (rhythm section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Checking the remaining capacity . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 76
Exchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 75
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Stored files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Send/return effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 100
Assigning a name to a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Editing a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Saving/swapping patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Selecting a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Song Position Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Start/Stop/Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Status keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Step input
Rhythm pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71
Rhythm song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Stereo link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

ZOOM MRS-8 147

MRS-8(E).book 148 ページ ２００４年７月３０日 金曜日 午後５時２４分

■ The FCC regulation warning (for U.S.A.)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

ZOOM CORPORATION
ITOHPIA Iwamotocho 2chome Bldg., 2-11-2, Iwamoto-cho,
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0032, Japan
Web Site: http://www.zoom.co.jp
MRS-8 5000-1